abb group - relion® line differential protection …...a high impedance differential protection can...
TRANSCRIPT
— RELION® 670 SERIES
Line differential protection RED670 Version 2.1 Product guide
Contents
1. Application............................................................................. 3
2. Available functions...............................................................9
3. Differential protection...................................................... 22
4. Impedance protection......................................................26
5. Current protection............................................................. 31
6. Voltage protection.............................................................33
7. Frequency protection....................................................... 34
8. Multipurpose protection..................................................35
9. Secondary system supervision.......................................35
10. Control.................................................................................36
11. Scheme communication.................................................38
12. Logic.................................................................................... 40
13. Monitoring..........................................................................42
14. Metering............................................................................. 44
15. Human machine interface..............................................45
16. Basic IED functions.......................................................... 45
17. Station communication ................................................. 45
18. Remote communication.................................................46
19. Hardware description..................................................... 46
20. Connection diagrams......................................................49
21. Technical data................................................................... 50
22. Ordering for customized IED.......................................130
23. Ordering for pre-configured IED.................................141
24. Ordering for Accessories.............................................. 147
Disclaimer
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no
responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. Drawings and diagrams are not binding.
© Copyright 2015 ABB. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
2 ABB
1. ApplicationM13635-3 v6
The IED is used for the protection, control andmonitoring of overhead lines and cables in all types ofnetworks. The IED can be used from distribution up tothe highest voltage levels. It is suitable for theprotection of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminallines where the requirement for tripping is one-, two-,and/or three-phase. The IED is also suitable forprotection of cable feeders to generator blocktransformers.
The phase segregated current differential protectionprovides an excellent sensitivity for high resistive faultsand gives a secure phase selection. The availability of sixstabilized current inputs per phase allows use on multi-breaker arrangements in three terminal applications orup to five terminal applications with single breakerarrangements. The communication between the IEDsinvolved in the differential scheme is based on the IEEEC37.94 standard and can be duplicated for importantinstallations when required for redundancy reasons.Charging current compensation allows high sensitivityalso on long overhead lines and cables.
A full scheme distance protection is included to provideindependent protection in parallel with the differentialscheme in case of a communication channel failure forthe differential scheme. The distance protection thenprovide protection for the entire line including theremote end back up capability either in case of acommunications failure or via use of an independentcommunication channel to provide a fully redundantscheme of protection (that is a second main protectionscheme). Eight channels for intertrip and other binarysignals are available in the communication between theIEDs.
A high impedance differential protection can be used toprotect T-feeders or line reactors.
The auto-reclose for single-, two- and/or three phasereclosing includes priority circuits for multi-breakerarrangements. It co-operates with the synchronismcheck function with high-speed or delayed reclosing.
High set instantaneous phase and earth overcurrent,four step directional or un-directional delayed phaseand earth overcurrent, thermal overload and two stepunder- and overvoltage functions are examples of theavailable functions allowing the user to fulfill anyapplication requirement.
The IED can also be provided with a full control andinterlocking functionality including co-operation withthe synchronism check function to allow integration ofthe main or back-up control.
Disturbance recording and fault locator are available toallow independent post-fault analysis after primarydisturbances. The Disturbance recorder will also showremote station currents, as received to this IED, timecompensated with measure communication time.
Out of Step function is available to separate powersystem sections close to electrical centre at occurringout of step.
The IED can be used in applications with IEC61850-9-2LE process bus with up to six merging units(MU) depending on other functionality included in theIED.
Each MU has eight analogue channels, normally fourcurrents and four voltages. Conventional and MergingUnit channels can be mixed freely in the application.
If IEC 61850-9-2LE communication isinterrupt, data from the merging units(MU) after the time for interruption willbe incorrect. Both data stored in theIED and displayed on the local HMI willbe corrupt. For this reason it isimportant to connect signal fromrespective MU units (SMPLLOST) to thedisturbance recorder.
Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient wayto test wiring in substations as well as testingconfiguration logic in the IEDs. Basically it means that allbinary inputs and outputs on the IED I/O modules (BOM,BIM, IOM & SOM) can be forced to arbitrary values.
Central Account Management is an authenticationinfrastructure that offers a secure solution for enforcingaccess control to IEDs and other systems within asubstation. This incorporates management of useraccounts, roles and certificates and the distribution ofsuch, a procedure completely transparent to the user.
Flexible Product Naming allows the customer to use anIED-vendor independent 61850 model of the IED. Thiscustomer model will be used as the IEC 61850 datamodel, but all other aspects of the IED will remainunchanged (e.g., names on the local HMI and names inthe tools). This offers significant flexibility to adapt theIED to the customers system and standard solution
The logic is prepared with a graphical tool. Theadvanced logic capability allows special applicationssuch as automatic opening of disconnectors in multi-breaker arrangements, closing of breaker rings, loadtransfer logics etc. The graphical configuration toolensures simple and fast testing and commissioning.
Line differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC1MRK 505 346-BEN F
Issued: March 2019Revision: F
ABB 3
A loop testing function allows complete testingincluding remote end IED when local IED is set in testmode.
M11788-3 v10
Communication via optical connections ensuresimmunity against disturbances.
SEMOD51220-5 v13
Four packages have been defined for followingapplications:
• Single-breaker (double or single bus) with three phasetripping (A31)
• Single-breaker (double or single bus) with singlephase tripping (A32)
• Multi-breaker (one-and a half or ring) with three phasetripping (B31)
• Multi-breaker (one-and a half or ring) with singlephase tripping (B32)
Optional functions are not configured but a maximumconfiguration with all optional functions are available astemplate in the graphical configuration tool. Analoginputs and binary input/output signals are pre-definedfor basic use. Other signals may be required by eachparticular application.
Add binary I/O boards as required for the applicationwhen ordering.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
4 ABB
Description of configuration A31M15201-3 v5
QB1 QB2
QA1
QB9
QC9
WA1
WA2
RED670 A31 – Single Breaker with Three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
LOV PTUV
27 3U<
CV MMXN
MET P/Q
ETP MMTR
MET W/Varh
V MMXU
MET U
LC PTTR
26 θ>
C MMXU
MET I
UV2 PTUV
27 2(3U<)
C MSQI
MET Isqi
BRC PTOC
46 Iub>
DRP RDRE
DFR/SER DR
OV2 PTOV
59 2(3U>)
VN MMXU
MET UN
V MSQI
MET Usqi
OC4 PTOC
51_67 4(3I>)
CC RBRF
50BF 3I>BF
PH PIOC
50 3I>>
LMB RFLO
21FL FL
L3C PDIF
87L 3Id/I>
REM CT
WA2_VT
Other Functions available from the function library
VD SPVC
60 Ud>
FDPS PDIS
21
NS4 PTOC
46I2 4(I2>)
CV GAPC
2(I>/U<)
ZCV PSOF
Optional Functions
VDC PTOV
60 Ud>
Q CBAY
Control
ROV2 PTOV
59N 2(U0>)
CCS SPVC
87 INd/I
FMPS PDIS
21
EF PIOC
50N IN>>
GOP PDOP
32 P>
HZ PDIF
87 Id>
L6C PDIF
87L 3Id/I>
STB PTOC
50STB 3I>STB
S SIMG
63
LT3C PDIF
87LT 3Id/I>
LT6C PDIS
87LT 3Id/I>
SA PTOF
81 f>
SA PTUF
81 f<
GUP PDUP
37 P<
ZMM PDIS
21 Z<
ZMH PDIS
21 Z<
ZMQ PDIS
21 Z<
ZM RPSB
68 Zpsb
PSP PPAM
78 Ucos
ZSM GAPC
OEX PVPH
24 U/f>
ZC PSCH
85
ZCRW PSCH
85
ZCLC PSCH S CILO
3 Control
VN MMXU
MET UN
VN MMXU
MET UN
SMB RREC
79 5(0→1)
SMP PTRC
94 1→0 25 SC/VC
SES RSYN
FUF SPVC
U>/I<
LDL PSCH
87L
WA1_VT
LINE_CT
S SIML
71
CC PDSC
52PD PD
SDEPSDE
67N IN>
EF4 PTOC
51N_67N 4(IN>)
ZMF PDIS
21 Z<
ZD RDIR
21 Z<_>
PSL PSCH
Zpsl
OOS PPAM
78 Ucos
SA PFRC
81 df/dt<>
ECRW PSCH
85
EC PSCH
85
S CSWI
3 Control
S XSWI
3 Control
Q CRSV
3 Control
S XCBR
3 Control
S SCBR
LINE_VT
IEC05000842 V4 EN-US
Figure 1. Configuration diagram for configuration A31
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 5
Description of configuration A32M15201-21 v5
QB1 QB2
QA1
QB9
QC9
WA1
WA2
RED670 A32 – Single Breaker with Single phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
LOV PTUV
27 3U<
CV MMXN
MET P/Q
ETP MMTR
MET W/Varh
V MMXU
MET U
LC PTTR
26 θ>
C MMXU
MET I
UV2 PTUV
27 2(3U<)
C MSQI
MET Isqi
BRC PTOC
46 Iub>
DRP RDRE
DFR/SER DR
OV2 PTOV
59 2(3U>)
VN MMXU
MET UN
V MSQI
MET Usqi
OC4 PTOC
51_67 4(3I>)
CC RBRF
50BF 3I>BF
PH PIOC
50 3I>>
LMB RFLO
21FL FL
L3C PDIF
87L 3Id/I>
REM CT
WA2_VT
Other Functions available from the function library
VD SPVC
60 Ud>
FDPS PDIS
21
NS4 PTOC
46I2 4(I2>)
CV GAPC
2(I>/U<)
ZCV PSOF
Optional Functions
VDC PTOV
60 Ud>
Q CBAY
Control
ROV2 PTOV
59N 2(U0>)
CCS SPVC
87 INd/I
FMPS PDIS
21
EF PIOC
50N IN>>
GOP PDOP
32 P>
HZ PDIF
87 Id>
L6C PDIF
87L 3Id/I>
STB PTOC
50STB 3I>STB
S SIMG
63
LT3C PDIF
87LT 3Id/I>
LT6C PDIS
87LT 3Id/I>
SA PTOF
81 f>
SA PTUF
81 f<
GUP PDUP
37 P<
ZMM PDIS
21 Z<
ZMH PDIS
21 Z<
ZMQ PDIS
21 Z<
ZM RPSB
68 Zpsb
PSP PPAM
78 Ucos
ZSM GAPC
OEX PVPH
24 U/f>
ZC PSCH
85
ZCRW PSCH
85
ZCLC PSCH S CILO
3 Control
VN MMXU
MET UN
VN MMXU
MET UN
SMB RREC
79 5(0→1)
SMP PTRC
94 1→0 25 SC/VC
SES RSYN
FUF SPVC
U>/I<
LDL PSCH
87L
WA1_VT
LINE_CT
S SIML
71
CC PDSC
52PD PD
SDEPSDE
67N IN>
EF4 PTOC
51N_67N 4(IN>)
ZMF PDIS
21 Z<
ZD RDIR
21 Z<_>
PSL PSCH
Zpsl
OOS PPAM
78 Ucos
SA PFRC
81 df/dt<>
ECRW PSCH
85
EC PSCH
85
S CSWI
3 Control
S XSWI
3 Control
Q CRSV
3 Control
S XCBR
3 Control
S SCBR
LINE_VT
ZC1P PSCH
85
ZC1W PSCH
85
IEC05000840 V4 EN-US
Figure 2. Configuration diagram for configuration A32
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
6 ABB
Description of configuration B31M15201-42 v5
QB1
WA1_QB6
QB61
QB62
LINE2_QB9
WA2_QB6
WA1_QA1
TIE_QA1
RED670 B31 – Multi Breaker with Three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
CC RBRF
50BF 3I>BF
VN MMXU
MET UN
LDL PSCH
87L
ETP MMTR
MET W/Varh
CV MMXN
MET P/Q
QB2
WA2_QA1
UV2 PTUV
27 3U<
OC4 PTOC
51_67 4(3I>)
OV2 PTOV
59 3U>
LOV PTUV
27 3U<
V MMXU
MET U
C MSQI
MET Isqi
DRP RDRE
DFR/SER DR
V MSQI
MET Usqi
SMB RREC
79 0→1
SMP PTRC
94 1→0
SES RSYN
25 SC
SMB RREC
79 5(0→1)
SMP PTRC
94 1→0
SES RSYN
25 SC/VC
FUF SPVC
U>/I<
LC PTTR
26 3I>STBθ>
C MMXU
MET I
BRC PTOC
46 Iub>
PH PIOC
50 3I>>
ΣL6C PDIF
87L 3Id/I>
REM CT1
REM CT2
CC RBRF
50BF 3I>BF
LINE1_QB9
S SIMG
63
Other Functions available from the function library
Optional Functions
ROV2 PTOV
59N 2(U0>)
VDC PTOV
60 Ud>
STB PTOC
50STB3I>STB
CCS SPVC
87 INd/I
Q CBAY
3 Control
FDPS PDIS
21
FMPS PDIS
21
EF4 PTOC
51N_67N 4(IN>)
CV GAPC
2(I>/U<)
VD SPVC
60 Ud>
ZD RDIR
21 Z<_>
SDE PSDE
67N IN>
ZMH PDIS
21 Z<
HZ PDIF
87 Id>
NS4 PTOC
46I2 4(I2>)
ZSM GAPC
ZCV PSOF
OOS PPAM
78 Ucos
PSL PSCH
Zpsl
GUP PDUP
37 P<
LT6C PDIF
87LT 3Id/I>
EF PIOC
50N IN>>
ZMQ PDIS
21 Z<
ZM RPSB
68 Zpsb
ZMF PDIS
21 Z<
PSP PPAM
78 Ucos
ZMM PDIS
21 Z<
SA PFRC
81 df/dt<>
EC PSCH
85
SA PTUF
81 f<
SA PTOF
81 f>
OEX PVPH
24 U/f>
GOP PDOP
32 P>
S CILO
3 Control
S CSWI
3 Control
ZCLC PSCHZCRW PSCH
85
S SCBRQ CRSV
3 Control
ZC PSCH
85
ECRW PSCH
85
S XCBR
3 Control
S XSWI
3 Control
S SIML
71
CC PDSC
52PD PD
VN MMXU
MET UN
VN MMXU
MET UN
VN MMXU
MET UN
LMB RFLO
21FL FL
WA1
WA1_VT
WA1_CT
LINE1_VT
TIE_CT
LINE2_VT
WA2_VT
WA2
IEC05000843 V4 EN-US
Figure 3. Configuration diagram for configuration B31
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 7
Description of configuration B32M15201-60 v5
QB1
WA1_QB6
QB61
QB62
LINE2_QB9
WA2_QB6
WA1_QA1
TIE_QA1
RED670 B32 – Multi Breaker with Single phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
CC RBRF
50BF 3I>BF
VN MMXU
MET UN
LDL PSCH
87L
ETP MMTR
MET W/Varh
CV MMXN
MET P/Q
QB2
WA2_QA1
UV2 PTUV
27 3U<
OC4 PTOC
51_67 4(3I>)
OV2 PTOV
59 3U>
LOV PTUV
27 3U<
V MMXU
MET U
C MSQI
MET Isqi
DRP RDRE
DFR/SER DR
V MSQI
MET Usqi
SMB RREC
79 0→1
SMP PTRC
94 1→0
SES RSYN
25 SC
SMB RREC
79 5(0→1)
SMP PTRC
94 1→0
SES RSYN
25 SC/VC
FUF SPVC
U>/I<
LC PTTR
26 3I>STBθ>
C MMXU
MET I
BRC PTOC
46 Iub>
PH PIOC
50 3I>>
ΣL6C PDIF
87L 3Id/I>
REM CT1
REM CT2
CC RBRF
50BF 3I>BF
LINE1_QB9
S SIMG
63
Other Functions available from the function library
Optional Functions
ROV2 PTOV
59N 2(U0>)
VDC PTOV
60 Ud>
STB PTOC
50STB 3I>STB
CCS SPVC
87 INd/I
Q CBAY
3 Control
FDPS PDIS
21
FMPS PDIS
21
EF4 PTOC
51N_67N 4(IN>)
CV GAPC
2(I>/U<)
VD SPVC
60 Ud>
ZD RDIR
21 Z<_>
SDE PSDE
67N IN>
ZMH PDIS
21 Z<
HZ PDIF
87 Id>
NS4 PTOC
46I2 4(I2>)
ZSM GAPC
ZCV PSOF
OOS PPAM
78 Ucos
PSL PSCH
Zpsl
GUP PDUP
37 P<
LT6C PDIF
87LT 3Id/I>
EF PIOC
50N IN>>
ZMQ PDIS
21 Z<
ZM RPSB
68 Zpsb
ZMF PDIS
21 Z<
PSP PPAM
78 Ucos
ZMM PDIS
21 Z<
SA PFRC
81 df/dt<>
EC PSCH
85
SA PTUF
81 f<
SA PTOF
81 f>
OEX PVPH
24 U/f>
GOP PDOP
32 P>
S CILO
3 Control
S CSWI
3 Control
ZCLC PSCHZCRW PSCH
85
S SCBRQ CRSV
3 Control
ZC PSCH
85
ECRW PSCH
85
S XCBR
3 Control
S XSWI
3 Control
S SIML
71
VN MMXU
MET UN
VN MMXU
MET UN
VN MMXU
MET UN
LMB RFLO
21FL FL
WA1
WA1_VT
WA1_CT
LINE1_VT
TIE_CT
LINE2_VT
WA2_VT
WA2
CC PDSC
52PD PD
CC PDSC
52PD PD
ZC1W PSCH
85
ZC1P PSCH
85
IEC05000841 V4 EN-US
Figure 4. Configuration diagram for configuration B32
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
8 ABB
2. Available functions
Main protection functionsGUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v12.1.1
Table 1. Example of quantities
2 = number of basic instances
0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 9
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670(Customized)
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 1Ph high impedance differential protection 0-3 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance 0–2
L3CPDIF 87L Line differential protection, 3 CT sets, 2–3 lineends
1 1 1
L6CPDIF 87L Line differential protection, 6 CT sets, 3–5 lineends
1 1-A04 1 1-A04 1
LT3CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection, 3 CT sets, withinzone transformers, 2–3 line ends
1 1-A05 1-A05
LT6CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection, 6 CT sets, withinzone transformers, 3–5 line ends
1 1-A06 1-A06 1-A06 1-A06
LDLPSCH 87L Line differential protection logic 1 1 1 1 1
LDRGFC 11REL Additional security logic for differentialprotection
0-1
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS,ZMQAPDIS
21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateralcharacteristic
0-5 1-B103-B11
1-B103-B11
1-B103-B11
1-B103-B11
ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral 0-2 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11
ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS
21 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateralcharacteristic for series compensated lines
0-5 3-B16 3-B16 3-B16 3-B16
ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral, includingseries compensation
0-2 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic withfixed angle
0-2 1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
ZMHPDIS 21 Fullscheme distance protection, mhocharacteristic
0-5 4-B17 4-B17 4-B17 4-B17
ZMMPDIS,ZMMAPDIS
21 Fullscheme distance protection, quadrilateral forearth faults
0-5 4-B17 4-B17 4-B17 4-B17
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element for mhocharacteristic
0-2 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17
ZDARDIR Additional distance protection directionalfunction for earth faults
0-2 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision logic 0-1 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with loadenchroachment
0-2 2-B17 2-B17 2-B17 2-B17
ZMRPDIS,ZMRAPDIS
21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateralcharacteristic, separate settings
0-5
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic withfixed angle
0-2
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection, quadrilateraland mho - 6 zones
0–1 1–B28 1–B28 1–B28 1–B28
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
10 ABB
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670(Customized)
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection for seriescompensated lines, quadrilateral and mho - 6zones
0–1 1-B29 1-B29 1-B29 1-B29
ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0-1 1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1 1-B03 1-B03 1-B03 1-B03
PSPPPAM 78 Pole slip/out-of-step protection 0-1 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0–1 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage andcurrent based
0-1 1-B111-B161-B17
1-B111-B161-B17
1-B111-B161-B17
1-B111-B161-B17
PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1 1-B04
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 11
Back-up protection functionsGUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v10.1.1
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670(Customized)
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrentprotection
0-3 1 1 1 1
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase overcurrentprotection
0-3 1 1 1 1
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrentprotection
0-1 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
EF4PTOC 51N67N2)
Four step residual overcurrentprotection
0-3 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phasesequence overcurrent protection
0-2 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residualovercurrent and power protection
0-1 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one timeconstant, Celsius
0–2 1 1 1 1
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one timeconstant, Fahrenheit
0–2 1 1 1 1
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-2 1 2 1 2
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-2 1-B11 1B1-B11
1-B11 1B1-B11
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-2 1 2 1 2
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-2 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-2 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1 1 1 1 1
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrentprotection
0-3
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltageprotection
0-2 1 1 1 1
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-1 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2 2 2 2 2
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1 1 1 1 1
PAPGAPC 27 Radial feeder protection 0–1
Frequency protection
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
12 ABB
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670(Customized)
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change frequency protection 0-6 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-4 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01
General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6
1) 67 requires voltage2) 67N requires voltage
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 13
Control and monitoring functionsGUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v12.1.1
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing 0-2 1 2 1 2
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-4 11-H04
22-H05
11-H04
22-H05
APC10 3 Apparatus control for single bay, max 10 apparatuses(1CB) incl. interlocking
0-1 1-H27 1-H27
APC15 3 Apparatus control for single bay, max 15 apparatuses(2CBs) incl. interlocking
0-1 1-H08 1-H08
QCBAY Apparatus control 1 1 1 1 1
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch positions 1 1 1 1 1
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1 1 1 1 1
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMIpresentation
15 15 15 15 15
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 20 20 20 20 20
DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double Pointindication
16 16 16 16 16
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control 8 signals 5 5 5 5 5
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 3 3 3 3 3
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4 4 4 4 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 50 50 50 50 50
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC60870-5-103
50 50 50 50 50
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC60870-5-103
50 50 50 50 50
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC60870-5-103
4 4 4 4 4
Secondarysystemsupervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-2 1 2 1 2
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-3 3 3 3 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference 0-2 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 6 6 6 6 6
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
14 ABB
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5 5 5 5
AND, GATE, INV,LLD, OR,PULSETIMER,RSMEMORY,SRMEMORY,TIMERSET, XOR
Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 2) 40-280 40-280
40-280 40-280
40-280
ANDQT,INDCOMBSPQT,INDEXTSPQT,INVALIDQT,INVERTERQT,ORQT,PULSETIMERQT,RSMEMORYQT,SRMEMORYQT,TIMERSETQT,XORQT
Configurable logic blocks Q/T (see Table 3) 0–1
AND, GATE, INV,LLD, OR,PULSETIMER,SLGAPC,SRMEMORY,TIMERSET,VSGAPC, XOR
Extension logic package (see Table 4) 0–1
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 18 18 18 18 18
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with Logic Noderepresentation
16 16 16 16 16
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 18 18 18 18
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Noderepresentation
16 16 16 16 16
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression andoverflow supervision
12 12 12 12 12
INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 12 12 12 12 12
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 12 12 12 12 12
Monitoring
CVMMXN,VMMXU, CMSQI,VMSQI, VNMMXU
Measurements 6 6 6 6 6
CMMXU Measurements 10 10 10 10 10
AISVBAS Function block for service value presentation ofsecondary analog inputs
1 1 1 1 1
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 15
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
DRPRDRE,A1RADR-A4RADR,B1RBDR-B8RBDR
Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1
SPGAPC Generic communication function for Single Pointindication
64 64 64 64 64
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for Single Pointindication 16 inputs
16 16 16 16 16
MVGAPC Generic communication function for Measured Value 24 24 24 24 24
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3 3 3 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66 66 66 66 66
SSIMG 63 Gas medium supervision 21 21 21 21 21
SSIML 71 Liquid medium supervision 3 3 3 3 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker monitoring 0-6 3-M13 6-M15 3-M13 6-M15
LMBRFLO Fault locator 1 1 1 1 1
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 3 3 3 3 3
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 20 20 20 20 20
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30 30 30 30 30
TEILGAPC Running hour-meter 6 6 6 6 6
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand handling 6 6 6 6 6
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
16 ABB
Table 2. Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks
Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 289
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40
Table 3. Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T
Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40
Table 4. Total number of instances for extended logic package
Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 180
GATE 49
INV 180
LLD 49
OR 180
PULSETIMER 59
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 110
TIMERSET 49
VSGAPC 130
XOR 49
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 17
CommunicationGUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v12.1.1
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670(Customized)
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between SPA and IEC60870-5-103 for SLM
1 1 1 1 1
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1 1 1 1
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general TCPprotocol
1 1 1 1 1
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communicationprotocol
1 1 1 1 1
CH1TCP, CH2TCP,CH3TCP, CH4TCP
DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communicationprotocol
1 1 1 1 1
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485communication protocol
1 1 1 1 1
MST1TCP,MST2TCP,MST3TCP,MST4TCP
DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP andEIA-485 communication protocol
1 1 1 1 1
IEC 61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE forinterlocking
59 59 59 59 59
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 16 16 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a doublepoint value
64 64 64 64 64
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive aninteger value
32 32 32 32 32
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive ameasurand value
60 60 60 60 60
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a singlepoint value
64 64 64 64 64
MULTICMDRCV,MULTICMDSND
Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
FRONT, LANABI,LANAB, LANCDI,LANCD
Ethernet configuration of links 1 1 1 1 1
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
18 ABB
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670(Customized)
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
GATEWAY Ethernet configuration of link one 1 1 1 1 1
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serialcommunication
1 1 1 1 1
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication forRS485
1 1 1 1 1
AGSAL Generic security application component 1 1 1 1 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1 1
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol 1 1 1 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security eventson protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
1 1 1 1 1
FSTACCSFSTACCSNA
Field service tool access via SPA protocolover ethernet communication
1 1 1 1 1
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters 1 1 1 1 1
ALTRK Service Tracking 1 1 1 1 1
SINGLELCCH Single ethernet port link status 1 1 1 1 1
PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet port link status 1 1 1 1 1
Process bus communication IEC 61850-9-21)
PRP IEC 62439-3 parallel redundancy protocol 0-1 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03
Remote communication
Binary signal transfer receive/transmit 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1 1 1 1 1
Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for distanceor overcurrent protection
0-2 1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
ZC1PPSCH 85 Phase segregated scheme communicationlogic for distance protection
0-2 1-B05 1-B05
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logicfor distance protection
0-2 1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
1-B111-B16
ZC1WPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logicfor phase segregated communication
0-2 1-B05 1-B05
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 19
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential
RED670(Customized)
RED
670
(A31
)
RED
670
(B31
)
RED
670
(A32
)
RED
670
(B32
)
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for residualovercurrent protection
0-1 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logicfor residual overcurrent protection
0-1 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
DTT Direct transfer trip 0-1
1) Only included for 9-2LE products
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
20 ABB
Basic IED functionsGUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v9
Table 5. Basic IED functions
IEC 61850 or functionname
Description
INTERRSIGSELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, SYNCHCAN,SYNCHGPS,SYNCHCMPPS,SYNCHLON,SYNCHPPH, SYNCHPPS,SNTP, SYNCHSPA
Time synchronization
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN, DSTENABLE,DSTEND
GPS time synchronization module
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
DOSLANAB Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
PRODINF Product information
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 21
Table 5. Basic IED functions, continued
IEC 61850 or functionname
Description
RUNTIME IED Runtime Comp
CAMCONFIG Central account management configuration
CAMSTATUS Central account management status
TOOLINF Tools Information component
SAFEFILECOPY Safe file copy function
Table 6. Local HMI functions
IEC 61850 or functionname
ANSI Description
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5FNKEYMD1–FNKEYMD5
Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1–GRP1_LED15GRP2_LED1–GRP2_LED15GRP3_LED1–GRP3_LED15
Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
3. Differential protection
High impedance differential protection, single phaseHZPDIF
M13071-3 v13
High impedance differential protection, single phase(HZPDIF) functions can be used when the involved CTcores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizingcharacteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondarycurrent summation by wiring. Actually all CT secondarycircuits which are involved in the differential scheme areconnected in parallel. External series resistor, and avoltage dependent resistor which are both mountedexternally to the IED, are also required.
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IEDaccessories in the Product Guide.
HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars,reactors, motors, auto-transformers, capacitor banksand so on. One such function block is used for a high-impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such
function blocks are used to form three-phase, phase-segregated differential protection.
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedanceREFPDIF
M13047-3 v18
Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedancefunction REFPDIF can be used on all directly or low-impedance earthed windings. The REFPDIF functionprovides high sensitivity and high speed tripping as itprotects each winding separately and thus does notneed inrush stabilization.
The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased functionwith an additional zero sequence current directionalcomparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity andstability during through faults.
REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Fivecurrents are measured at the most complicatedconfiguration as shown in Figure 5.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
22 ABB
The most typicalapplication
YNdx
dCB
CT
CT
CB Y
IED
CB CB
CB CB
Autotransformer
The most complicatedapplication - autotransformer
CT CT
CT CT
IEC05000058-2-en.vsd
IEC05000058-2 V1 EN-US
Figure 5. Examples of applications of the REFPDIF
Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF,L6CPDIF
M14917-3 v6
Line differential protection applies the Kirchhoff's lawand compares the currents entering and leaving theprotected multi-terminal circuit, consisting of overheadpower lines and cables. Under the condition that thereare no in-line or tap (shunt) power transformers withinthe zone of protection, it offers a phase segregatedfundamental frequency current based differentialprotection with high sensitivity and provides phaseselection information for single-pole tripping
The three-terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with or without a 1½ circuit breakerarrangement in one end, as well as three-terminal lineswith single breaker arrangements at all terminals.
IEC05000039-3-en.vsd
Protected zone
Communication channelIED IED
IEC05000039 V3 EN-US
Figure 6. Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line
The six-terminal versions are used for conventional two-terminal lines with 1½ circuit breaker arrangements in
both ends, as well as multi-terminal lines with up to fiveterminals.
Protected zone
Comm. Channel
IEC05000040_2_en.vsd
IED
IED
IED
Comm. ChannelComm. Channel
IEC05000040 V2 EN-US
Figure 7. Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1½ breaker arrangements
The current differential algorithm provides highsensitivity for internal faults and it has excellentstability for external faults. Current samples from all CTsare exchanged between the IEDs in the line ends(master-master mode) or sent to one IED (master-slavemode) for evaluation.
A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made wherethe bias current is the highest phase current in any lineend, giving a secure through-fault stability even withheavily saturated CTs. In addition to the restrainedevaluation, an unrestrained (instantaneous) high
differential current setting can be used for fast trippingof internal faults with very high currents.
A special feature with this function is that applicationswith small power transformers (rated current less than50% of the differential current setting IdMin) connectedas line taps (that is, as shunt power transformers),without measurements of currents in the tap, can behandled. The normal load current is considered to benegligible, and special measures must be taken in theevent of a short circuit on the LV side of thetransformer. In this application, the tripping of the
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 23
differential protection can be time-delayed for lowdifferential currents to achieve coordination withdownstream overcurrent IEDs. The local protection ofthe small tap power transformer is given the timeneeded to disconnect the faulty transformer.
A line charging current compensation providesincreased sensitivity of line differential protection.
Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF
M14932-3 v8
Two two-winding power transformers or one three-winding power transformer can be included in the linedifferential protection zone. In such application, thedifferential protection is based on the ampere turnsbalance between the transformer windings. Both two-
and three-winding transformers are correctlyrepresented with vector group compensations made inthe algorithm. The function includes 2nd and 5th
harmonic restraint and zero-sequence currentelimination. The phase-segregated differentialprotection with single-pole tripping is usually notpossible in such applications.
IED
IED IED
Protected zone
Comm. Channel
Comm. Channel
Comm. Channel
IEC05000042_2_en.vsdIEC05000042 V2 EN-US
Figure 8. Example of application on a three-terminal line with an in-line power transformer in the protection zone
Analog signal transfer for line differential protectionM13647-3 v7
The line differential protection function can be arrangedas a master-master system or a master-slave systemalternatively. In the former, current samples areexchanged between all IEDs, and an evaluation is madein each IED. This means that a 64 kbit/s communicationchannel is needed between every IED included in thesame line differential protection zone. In the latter,current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to onemaster IED where the evaluation is made, and tripsignals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In thissystem, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only
needed between the master, and each one of the slaveIEDs. The Master-Slave condition for the differentialfunction appears automatically when the settingOperation for the differential function is set to Off.
It is recommended to use the samefirmware version as well as hardwareversion for a specific line differentialscheme.
Protected zone
Comm. Channels
IED
IED IED IED
IED
IEC0500043_2_en.vsdIEC05000043 V2 EN-US
Figure 9. Five terminal lines with master-master system
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
24 ABB
RED670
Protected zone
Comm.Channels
RED670
RED670
en05000044.vsd
RED670
RED670
IEC05000044 V1 EN-US
Figure 10. Five terminal line with master-slave system
Current samples from IEDs located geographically apartfrom each other, must be time coordinated so that thecurrent differential algorithm can be executed correctly,this is done with the echo method.For applicationswhere transmit and receive times can differ, theoptional built in GPS receivers can be used
The communication link is continuously monitored, andan automatic switchover to a standby link is possibleafter a preset time.
Additional security logic for differential protectionLDRGFC
GUID-8F918A08-E50E-4E7B-BDCA-FF0B5534B289 v3
Additional security logic for differential protection(LDRGFC) can help the security of the protectionespecially when the communication system is inabnormal status or for example when there isunspecified asymmetry in the communication link. Ithelps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of theprotection. LDRGFC is more sensitive than the mainprotection logic to always release operation for all faultsdetected by the differential function. LDRGFC consistsof four sub functions:
• Phase-to-phase current variation• Zero sequence current criterion• Low voltage criterion• Low current criterion
Phase-to-phase current variation takes the currentsamples as input and it calculates the variation usingthe sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phasecurrent variation function is major one to fulfill theobjectives of the startup element.
Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence currentas input. It increases the security of protection duringthe high impedance fault conditions.
Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages andphase-to-phase voltages as inputs. It increases thesecurity of protection when the three-phase faultoccurred on the weak end side.
Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputsand it increases the dependability during the switchonto fault case of unloaded line.
The differential function can be allowed to trip as noload is fed through the line and protection is notworking correctly.
Features:
• Startup element is sensitive enough to detect theabnormal status of the protected system
• Startup element does not influence the operationspeed of main protection
• Startup element would detect the evolving faults, highimpedance faults and three phase fault on weak side
• It is possible to block the each sub function of startupelement
• Startup signal has a settable pulse time
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 25
4.
Impedance protection
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateralcharacteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS
M13787-3 v13
The line distance protection is an up to five (dependingon product variant) zone full scheme protection functionwith three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults andthree fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each ofthe independent zones. Individual settings for each zonein resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use asback-up protection for transformer connected tooverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
ZMQPDIS together with Phase selection with loadencroachment FDPSPDIS has functionality for loadencroachment, which increases the possibility to detecthigh resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown infigure11.
en05000034.vsd
R
X
Forwardoperation
Reverseoperation
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US
Figure 11. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone withPhase selection with load encroachment functionFDPSPDIS activated
The independent measurement of impedance for eachfault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-inphase selection makes the function suitable inapplications with single-phase autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm preventsoverreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operateindependently of each other in directional (forward orreverse) or non-directional mode. This makes themsuitable, together with different communicationschemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines,multi-terminal lines.
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateralcharacteristic for series compensated linesZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS
SEMOD168173-4 v10
The line distance protection is an up to five (dependingon product variant) zone full scheme protection withthree fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and threefault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each of theindependent zones. Individual settings for each zoneresistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
Quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMCPDIS function has functionality for loadencroachment which increases the possibility to detecthigh resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
en05000034.vsd
R
X
Forwardoperation
Reverseoperation
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US
Figure 12. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone withload encroachment function activated
The independent measurement of impedance for eachfault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built inphase selection makes the function suitable inapplications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for thequadrilateral function prevents overreaching of zone1 atload exporting end at phase to earth-faults on heavilyloaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independentof each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, togetherwith different communication schemes, for theprotection of power lines and cables in complex networkconfigurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminallines.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
26 ABB
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic withfixed angle FDPSPDIS
M13139-3 v8
The operation of transmission networks today is inmany cases close to the stability limit. Due toenvironmental considerations, the rate of expansion andreinforcement of the power system is reduced, forexample, difficulties to get permission to build newpower lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classifythe different types of fault, so that single pole trippingand autoreclosing can be used plays an important role inthis matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristicwith fixed angle FDPSPDIS is designed to accuratelyselect the proper fault loop in the distance functiondependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in manytransmission networks may make fault resistancecoverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has abuilt-in algorithm for load encroachment, which givesthe possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of boththe phase selection and the measuring zones withoutinterfering with the load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selectiongives also important information about faulty phase(s),which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. Themeasuring elements continuously measure three phasecurrents and the residual current and, compare themwith the set values.
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristicZMHPDIS
SEMOD175459-4 v12
The numerical mho line distance protection is an up tofive (depending on product variant) zone full schemeprotection of short circuit and earth faults.
The zones have fully independent measuring andsettings, which gives high flexibility for all types of lines.
The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It issuitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines andmulti-terminal lines where the requirement for trippingis one-, two- and/or three-pole.
The independent measurement of impedance for eachfault loop together with a sensitive and reliable phaseselection makes the function suitable in applicationswith single phase autoreclosing.
Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided inthe function.
Adaptive load compensation algorithm preventsoverreaching at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loadedpower lines, see Figure 13.
IEC07000117-2-en.vsd
jX
Operation area Operation area
R
Operation area
No operation area No operation area
IEC07000117 V2 EN-US
Figure 13. Load encroachment influence on the offset mhocharacteristic
The distance protection zones can operate, independentof each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode (offset). This makes them suitable,together with different communication schemes, for theprotection of power lines and cables in complex networkconfigurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminallines and so on.
The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateralimpedance characteristic together with the mhocharacteristic increases the possibility to overcomeeventual lack of sensitivity of the mho element due tothe shaping of the curve at remote end faults.
The integrated control and monitoring functions offereffective solutions for operating and monitoring alltypes of transmission and sub-transmission lines.
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral forearth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS
SEMOD154544-4 v7
The line distance protection is an up to five (dependingon product variant) zone full scheme protection functionwith three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for eachof the independent zones. Individual settings for eachzone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for useon overhead lines and cables of different types andlengths.
The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral forearth fault functions have functionality for loadencroachment, which increases the possibility to detecthigh resistive faults on heavily loaded lines , see Figure14.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 27
en05000034.vsd
R
X
Forwardoperation
Reverseoperation
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US
Figure 14. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone withPhase selection, quadrilateral characteristic withsettable angle function FRPSPDIS activated
The independent measurement of impedance for eachfault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built inphase selection makes the function suitable inapplications with single phase auto-reclosing.
The distance protection zones can operate, independentof each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, togetherwith different communication schemes, for theprotection of power lines and cables in complex networkconfigurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminallines.
Directional impedance element for Mhocharacteristic ZDMRDIR
SEMOD175532-4 v2
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can beoptionally supervised by a phase unselective directionalfunction (phase unselective, because it is based onsymmetrical components).
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPCSEMOD153843-5 v3
The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC)includes features for fault inception detection and highSIR detection. It also includes the functionality for lossof potential logic as well as for the pilot channelblocking scheme.
ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two differentparts:
1. A fault inception detection logic2. High SIR detection logic
Faulty phase identification with load encroachmentFMPSPDIS
SEMOD153825-5 v7
The ability to accurately and reliably classify differenttypes of fault so that single phase tripping andautoreclosing can be used plays an important roll intoday's power systems.
The phase selection function is design to accuratelyselect the proper fault loop(s) in the distance functiondependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in manytransmission networks may in some cases interfere withthe distance protection zone reach and cause unwantedoperation. Therefore the function has a built inalgorithm for load encroachment, which gives thepossibility to enlarge the resistive setting of themeasuring zones without interfering with the load.
The output signals from the phase selection functionproduce important information about faulty phase(s),which can be used for fault analysis as well.
Distance protection zone, quadrilateralcharacteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS,ZMRAPDIS
GUID-014501E7-EE0D-440F-8DC8-C44B848E49D3 v2
The line distance protection is up to five zone fullscheme protection with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earthfault for each of the independent zones. Individualsettings for each zone in resistive and reactive reachgives flexibility for use as back-up protection fortransformer connected to overhead lines and cables ofdifferent types and lengths.
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMRPDIS together with Phase selection, quadrilateralcharacteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS hasfunctionality for load encroachment, which increases thepossibility to detect high resistive faults on heavilyloaded lines, as shown in figure 15.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
28 ABB
en05000034.vsd
R
X
Forwardoperation
Reverseoperation
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US
Figure 15. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone withPhase selection, quadrilateral characteristic withsettable angle function FRPSPDIS activated
The independent measurement of impedance for eachfault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-inphase selection makes the function suitable inapplications with single pole tripping and autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm preventsoverreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independentof each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, togetherwith different communication schemes, for theprotection of power lines and cables in complex networkconfigurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminallines and so on.
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic withsettable angle FRPSPDIS
GUID-09D0E480-C003-424E-BECD-A82BCB0052CD v1
The operation of transmission networks today is inmany cases close to the stability limit. Due toenvironmental considerations, the rate of expansion andreinforcement of the power system is reduced forexample, difficulties to get permission to build newpower lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classifythe different types of fault, so that single pole trippingand autoreclosing can be used plays an important role inthis matter. The phase selection function is designed toaccurately select the proper fault loop in the distancefunction dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in manytransmission networks may make fault resistancecoverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, the function hasa built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives
the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of boththe phase selection and the measuring zones withoutinterfering with the load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selectiongives also important information about faulty phase(s)which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. Themeasuring elements continuously measure three phasecurrents and the residual current and, compare themwith the set values.
High speed distance protection, quadrilateral andmho ZMFPDIS
GUID-2E34AB7F-886E-499F-8984-09041A89238D v6
The high speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) providesa sub-cycle, down towards a half-cycle operate time. Itssix zone, full scheme protection concept is entirelysuitable in applications with single-phase autoreclosing.
Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibilityto operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristicmode. This can even be decided separate for the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase loops. The six zones canoperate either independent of each other, or their startcan be linked (per zone) through the phase selector orthe first starting zone. This can provide fast operatetimes for evolving faults.
The operation of the phase-selection is primarily basedon a current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities),however there is also a phase selection criterionoperating in parallel which bases its operation onvoltage and current phasors exclusively. Additionally thedirectional element provides a fast and correctdirectional decision under difficult operating conditions,including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneousfaults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.Duringphase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power linesthere is an adaptive load compensation algorithm thatprevents overreaching of the distance zones in the loadexporting end, improving the selectivity of the function.This also reduces underreach in the importing end.
Distance zones quad with high speed distance forseries compensated networks ZMFCPDIS
GUID-C5C1ADD8-50A5-4485-848C-77D2222B56DC v6
The high speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS)provides a sub-cycle, down towards a half-cycle operatetime. Its six zone, full scheme protection concept isentirely suitable in applications with single-phaseautoreclosing.
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS isfundamentally the same function as ZMFPDIS butprovides more flexibility in zone settings to suit morecomplex applications, such as series compensated lines.In operation for series compensated networks, the
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 29
parameters of the directional function are altered tohandle voltage reversal.
Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibilityto operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristicmode. This can even be decided separate for the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase loops. The six zones canoperate either independent of each other, or their startcan be linked (per zone) through the phase selector orthe first starting zone. This can provide fast operatetimes for evolving faults.
The operation of the phase-selection is primarily basedon a current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities),however there is also a phase selection criterionoperating in parallel which bases its operation onvoltage and current phasors exclusively. Additionally thedirectional element provides a fast and correctdirectional decision under difficult operating conditions,including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneousfaults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.
During phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded powerlines there is an adaptive load compensation algorithmthat prevents overreaching of the distance zones in theload exporting end, improving the selectivity of thefunction. This also reduces underreach in the importingend.
Power swing detection ZMRPSBM13873-3 v11
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavyloads or trip of big generation plants.
Power swing detection function ZMRPSB is used todetect power swings and initiate block of all distanceprotection zones. Occurrence of earth-fault currentsduring a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB function, toallow fault clearance.
Power swing logic PSLPSCHSEMOD131350-4 v4
Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementaryfunction to Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB) function.It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults onpower lines during system oscillations (power swings orpole slips), when the distance protection functionshould normally be blocked. The complete logic consistsof two different parts:
• Communication and tripping part: provides selectivetripping on the basis of special distance protectionzones and a scheme communication logic, which arenot blocked during the system oscillations.
• Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation ofinstantaneous distance protection zone 1 foroscillations, which are initiated by faults and theirclearing on the adjacent power lines and other primaryelements.
Pole slip protection PSPPPAMSEMOD143246-4 v4
The situation with pole slip of a generator can be causedby different reasons.
A short circuit may occur in the external power grid,close to the generator. If the fault clearing time is toolong, the generator will accelerate so much, that thesynchronism cannot be maintained.
Undamped oscillations occur in the power system,where generator groups at different locations, oscillateagainst each other. If the connection between thegenerators is too weak the magnitude of the oscillationswill increase until the angular stability is lost.
The operation of a generator having pole slip will giverisk of damages to the generator, shaft and turbine.
• At each pole slip there will be significant torqueimpact on the generator-turbine shaft.
• In asynchronous operation there will be induction ofcurrents in parts of the generator normally notcarrying current, thus resulting in increased heating.The consequence can be damages on insulation andstator/rotor iron.
The Pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) function shall detectpole slip conditions and trip the generator as fast aspossible if the locus of the measured impedance isinside the generator-transformer block. If the centre ofpole slip is outside in the power grid, the first actionshould be to split the network into two parts, after lineprotection action. If this fails there should be operationof the generator PSPPPAM in zone 2, to prevent furtherdamages to the generator, shaft and turbine.
Pole slip protection PSPPPAMSEMOD143246-17 v7
Sudden events in an electric power system such as largechanges in load, fault occurrence or fault clearance, cancause power oscillations referred to as power swings. Ina non-recoverable situation, the power swings becomeso severe that the synchronism is lost, a conditionreferred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of thepole slip protection (PSPPPAM) is to detect, evaluate,and take the required action for pole slippingoccurrences in the power system.
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAMGUID-BF2F7D4C-F579-4EBD-9AFC-7C03296BD5D4 v7
The out-of-step protection OOSPPAM function in the IEDcan be used for both generator protection and as wellfor line protection applications.
The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect,evaluate, and take the required action during poleslipping occurrences in the power system.
The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions andtrips the generator as fast as possible, after the first
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
30 ABB
pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be inzone 1, which normally includes the generator and itsstep-up power transformer. If the center of oscillation isfound to be further out in the power system, in zone 2,more than one pole-slip is usually allowed before thegenerator-transformer unit is disconnected. Aparameter setting is available to take into account thecircuit breaker opening time. If there are several out-of-step relays in the power system, then the one whichfinds the center of oscillation in its zone 1 shouldoperate first.
Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available inOOSPPAM function to allow the direct connection of twogroups of three-phase currents; that may be needed forvery powerful generators, with stator windings split intotwo groups per phase, when each group is equippedwith current transformers. The protection functionperforms a simple summation of the currents of the twochannels I3P1 and I3P2.
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZSEMOD153619-5 v2
The optional phase preference logic main purpose is toprovide a selective tripping for cross-country faults inisolated or high impedance-earthed networks.
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage andcurrent based ZCVPSOF
M13829-3 v4
Automatic switch onto fault logic (ZCVPSOF) is afunction that gives an instantaneous trip at closing ofbreaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check isprovided to activate the function when the line is dead.
5. Current protection
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOCM12910-3 v12
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function hasa low transient overreach and short tripping time toallow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.
Four-step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOCM12846-3 v16
The four step three-phase overcurrent protectionfunction OC4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delayindependent for step 1 to 4 separately.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics areavailable together with an optional user defined timecharacteristic.
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltagepolarized with memory. The function can be set to bedirectional or non-directional independently for each ofthe steps.
A second harmonic blocking level can be set for thefunction and can be used to block each step individually.
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protectionEFPIOC
M12701-3 v14
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protectionEFPIOC has a low transient overreach and short trippingtimes to allow the use for instantaneous earth-faultprotection, with the reach limited to less than thetypical eighty percent of the line at minimum sourceimpedance. EFPIOC is configured to measure theresidual current from the three-phase current inputs andcan be configured to measure the current from aseparate current input.
Four step residual overcurrent protection, zerosequence and negative sequence direction EF4PTOC
M13667-3 v18
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOChas an inverse or definite time delay independent foreach step.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics areavailable together with an optional user definedcharacteristic.
EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directionalindependently for each of the steps.
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to beeither zero sequence or negative sequence.
Second harmonic blocking can be set individually foreach step.
EF4PTOC can be used as main protection for phase-to-earth faults.
EF4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-upfor example, in the case of the primary protection beingout of service due to communication or voltagetransformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together withcorresponding communication logic in permissive orblocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal andweak-end infeed functionality are available as well.
Residual current can be calculated by summing the threephase currents or taking the input from neutral CT
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protectionNS4PTOC
GUID-485E9D36-0032-4559-9204-101539A32F47 v5
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection(NS4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delayindependent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics areavailable together with an optional user definedcharacteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 31
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directionalindependently for each of the steps.
NS4PTOC can be used as main protection forunsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short circuits, phase-phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backupfor example, in the case of the primary protection beingout of service due to communication or voltagetransformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together withcorresponding communication logic in permissive orblocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as fordirectional zero sequence current can be used. Currentreversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available.
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and powerprotection SDEPSDE
SEMOD171438-5 v5
In isolated networks or in networks with high impedanceearthing, the earth fault current is significantly smallerthan the short circuit currents. In addition to this, themagnitude of the fault current is almost independent onthe fault location in the network. The protection can beselected to use either the residual current or residualpower component 3U0·3I0·cos j, for operating quantitywith maintained short circuit capacity. There is alsoavailable one nondirectional 3I0 step and one 3U0overvoltage tripping step.
No specific sensitive current input is needed. SDEPSDEcan be set as low 0.25% of IBase.
Thermal overload protection, one time constantLCPTTR/LFPTTR
M12020-4 v13
The increasing utilization of the power system closer tothe thermal limits has generated a need of a thermaloverload protection for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by otherprotection functions and the introduction of the thermaloverload protection can allow the protected circuit tooperate closer to the thermal limits.
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2tcharacteristic with settable time constant and a thermalmemory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsiusor Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function usedis LCPTTR (Celsius) or LFPTTR (Fahrenheit).
An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators totake action well before the line is tripped.
Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimatedtime to reclose after operation are presented.
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF
M11550-6 v16
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fastbackup tripping of the surrounding breakers in case theown breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based, contact-based or an adaptive combination ofthese two conditions.
A current check with extremely short reset time is usedas check criterion to achieve high security againstinadvertent operation.
Contact check criteria can be used where the faultcurrent through the breaker is small.
CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allowuse with single phase tripping applications. For thethree-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria canbe set to operate only if two out of four for example,two phases or one phase plus the residual current start.This gives a higher security to the back-up tripcommand.
CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- orthree-phase re-trip of its own breaker to avoidunnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at anincorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.
Stub protection STBPTOCM12902-3 v9
When a power line is taken out of service formaintenance and the line disconnector is opened inmulti-breaker arrangements the voltage transformerswill mostly be outside on the disconnected part. Theprimary line distance protection will thus not be able tooperate and must be blocked.
The stub protection STBPTOC covers the zone betweenthe current transformers and the open disconnector.The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function isreleased from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contacton the line disconnector.
Pole discordance protection CCPDSCM13269-3 v14
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequencecurrents which cause thermal stress on rotatingmachines and can cause unwanted operation of zerosequence or negative sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such asituation. If the situation persists the surroundingbreakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetricalload situation.
The Pole discordance protection function CCPDSCoperates based on information from auxiliary contactsof the circuit breaker for the three phases withadditional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currentswhen required.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
32 ABB
Directional over/underpower protection GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP
SEMOD175421-4 v6
The directional over-/under-power protectionGOPPDOP/GUPPDUP can be used wherever a high/lowactive, reactive or apparent power protection oralarming is required. The functions can alternatively beused to check the direction of active or reactive powerflow in the power system. There are a number ofapplications where such functionality is needed. Someof them are:
• detection of reversed active power flow• detection of high reactive power flow
Each function has two steps with definite time delay.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOCSEMOD171446-5 v2
The main purpose of the function Broken conductorcheck (BRCPTOC) is the detection of broken conductorson protected power lines and cables (series faults).Detection can be used to give alarm only or trip the linebreaker.
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protectionVRPVOC
GUID-935E1CE8-601F-40E2-8D22-2FF68420FADF v6
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection(VRPVOC) function can be used as generator backupprotection against short-circuits.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settablecurrent level that can be used either with definite timeor inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can bevoltage controlled/restrained.
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristicis also available within the function in order to providefunctionality for overcurrent protection withundervoltage seal-in.
6. Voltage protection
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUVM13789-3 v11
Undervoltages can occur in the power system duringfaults or abnormal conditions. Two step undervoltageprotection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to opencircuit breakers to prepare for system restoration atpower outages or as long-time delayed back-up toprimary protection.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse ordefinite time delay.
UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close tosystem service voltage.
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
M13798-3 v14
Overvoltages may occur in the power system duringabnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tapchanger regulating failures, and open line ends on longlines.
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) functioncan be used to detect open line ends, normally thencombined with a directional reactive over-powerfunction to supervise the system voltage. Whentriggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch inreactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them withinverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings closeto system service voltage.
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOVM13808-3 v10
Residual voltages may occur in the power system duringearth faults.
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOVfunction calculates the residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from asingle voltage input transformer fed from an open deltaor neutral point voltage transformer.
ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse ordefinite time delay.
Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earthfaults.
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPHM13319-3 v9
When the laminated core of a power transformer orgenerator is subjected to a magnetic flux densitybeyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components that are not designed to carryflux. This will cause eddy currents to flow. These eddycurrents can cause excessive heating and severedamage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relativelyshort time. The function has settable inverse operatingcurves and independent alarm stages.
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOVSEMOD153862-5 v7
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. Itcompares the voltages from two three phase sets ofvoltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm stepand one trip step.
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUVSEMOD171457-5 v7
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is suitable for use innetworks with an automatic system restorationfunction. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command tothe circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall belowthe set value for a time longer than the set time and thecircuit breaker remains closed.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 33
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fusefailure supervision FUFSPVC.
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPCGUID-82856D0B-5C5E-499A-9A62-CC511E4F047A v2
The PAPGAPC function is used to provide protection ofradial feeders having passive loads or weak end in-feedsources. It is possible to achieve fast tripping usingcommunication system with remote end or delayedtripping not requiring communication or uponcommunication system failure. For fast tripping, schemecommunication is required. Delayed tripping does notrequire scheme communication.
The PAPGAPC function performs phase selection usingmeasured voltages. Each phase voltage is compared tothe opposite phase-phase voltage. A phase is deemed tohave a fault if its phase voltage drops below a settablepercentage of the opposite phase-phase voltage. Thephase - phase voltages include memory. This memoryfunction has a settable time constant.
The voltage-based phase selection is used for both fastand delayed tripping. To achieve fast tripping, schemecommunication is required. Delayed tripping does notrequire scheme communication. It is possible to permitdelayed tripping only upon failure of thecommunications channel by blocking the delayedtripping logic with a communications channel healthyinput signal.
On receipt of the communications signal, phaseselective outputs for fast tripping are set based on thephase(s) in which the phase selection function hasoperated.
For delayed tripping, single pole and three pole delaysare separately and independently settable. Furthermore,it is possible to enable or disable single pole and threepole delayed tripping. For single phase faults, it ispossible to include a residual current check in thetripping logic. Three pole tripping is always selected forphase selection on more than one phase. Three poletripping will also occur if the residual current exceedsthe set level during fuse failure for a time longer thanthe three pole trip delay time.
7. Frequency protection
Underfrequency protection SAPTUFM13349-3 v12
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack ofgeneration in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF measures frequencywith high accuracy, and is used for load sheddingsystems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup
and so on. Separate definite time delays are providedfor operate and restore.
SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltagemeasurement and requires two phase-phase or threephase-neutral voltages to be connected. For informationabout how to connect analog inputs, refer toApplication manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines
Overfrequency protection SAPTOFM14953-3 v11
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicablein all situations, where reliable detection of highfundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops orshunt faults in the power network. Close to thegenerating plant, generator governor problems can alsocause over frequency.
SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and isused mainly for generation shedding and remedialaction schemes. It is also used as a frequency stageinitiating load restoring. A definite time delay isprovided for operate.
SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltagemeasurement and requires two phase-phase or threephase-neutral voltages to be connected. For informationabout how to connect analog inputs, refer toApplication manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRCM14965-3 v12
The rate-of-change frequency protection functionSAPFRC gives an early indication of a main disturbancein the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with highaccuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, loadshedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC candiscriminate between a positive or negative change offrequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. Theoperation is based on positive sequence voltagemeasurement and requires two phase-phase or threephase-neutral voltages to be connected. For informationabout how to connect analog inputs, refer toApplication manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
34 ABB
8. Multipurpose protection
General current and voltage protection CVGAPCM13083-11 v9
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC)can be utilized as a negative sequence currentprotection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such asopen phase or unsymmetrical faults.
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection forhigh resistive earth faults, outside the distanceprotection reach, for the transmission line. Threefunctions are used, which measures the neutral currentand each of the three phase voltages. This will give anindependence from load currents and this phaseselection will be used in conjunction with the detectionof the earth fault from the directional earth faultprotection function.
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protectionVRPVOC
GUID-935E1CE8-601F-40E2-8D22-2FF68420FADF v6
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection(VRPVOC) function can be used as generator backupprotection against short-circuits.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settablecurrent level that can be used either with definite timeor inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can bevoltage controlled/restrained.
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristicis also available within the function in order to providefunctionality for overcurrent protection withundervoltage seal-in.
9. Secondary system supervision
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVCM12444-3 v10
Open or short circuited current transformer cores cancause unwanted operation of many protection functionssuch as differential, earth-fault current and negative-sequence current functions.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares theresidual current from a three phase set of currenttransformer cores with the neutral point current on aseparate input taken from another set of cores on thecurrent transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuitand is used as alarm or to block protection functionsexpected to give inadvertent tripping.
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVCSEMOD113820-4 v11
The aim of the fuse failure supervision functionFUFSPVC is to block voltage measuring functions atfailures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertentoperations that otherwise might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has threedifferent detection methods, negative sequence andzero sequence based detection and an additional deltavoltage and delta current detection.
The negative sequence detection algorithm isrecommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on thenegative-sequence quantities.
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDsused in directly or low impedance earthed networks. It isbased on the zero sequence measuring quantities.
The selection of different operation modes is possibleby a setting parameter in order to take into account theparticular earthing of the network.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltagemeasurements can be added to the fuse failuresupervision function in order to detect a three phasefuse failure, which in practice is more associated withvoltage transformer switching during stationoperations.
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVCGUID-6AF2219A-264F-4971-8D03-3B8A9D0CB284 v4
Different protection functions within the protection IEDoperates on the basis of measured voltage at the relaypoint. Some example of protection functions are:
• Distance protection function.• Undervoltage function.• Energisation function and voltage check for the weak
infeed logic.
These functions can operate unintentionally, if a faultoccurs in the secondary circuits between voltageinstrument transformers and the IED. Theseunintentional operations can be prevented by VDSPVC.
VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults involtage measurement circuit, based on phase wisecomparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits.VDSPVC blocking output can be configured to blockfunctions that need to be blocked in case of faults in thevoltage circuit.
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPACGUID-EB0B11C3-FF79-4B8D-A335-649623E832F9 v2
The multi-purpose filter function block, SMAIHPAC, isarranged as a three-phase filter. It has very much thesame user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as thestandard pre-processing function block SMAI. Howeverthe main difference is that it can be used to extract anyfrequency component from the input signal. Thus it can,for example, be used to build sub-synchronousresonance protection for synchronous generator.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 35
10. Control
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizingSESRSYN
M12480-3 v15
The Synchronizing function allows closing ofasynchronous networks at the correct moment includingthe breaker closing time, which improves the networkstability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizingSESRSYN function checks that the voltages on bothsides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or withat least one side dead to ensure that closing can bedone safely.
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selectionscheme for double bus and 1½ breaker or ring busbararrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can bechecked by the function and can have different settings.
For systems, which are running asynchronous, asynchronizing function is provided. The main purpose ofthe synchronizing function is to provide controlledclosing of circuit breakers when two asynchronoussystems are going to be connected. The synchronizingfunction evaluates voltage difference, phase angledifference, slip frequency and frequency rate of changebefore issuing a controlled closing of the circuit breaker.Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.
Autorecloser SMBRRECM12390-3 v15
The autorecloser SMBRREC function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.
Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can beincluded by parameter setting. The first attempt can besingle-, two and/or three phase for single phase ormulti-phase faults respectively.
Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows onecircuit breaker to close first and the second will onlyclose if the fault proved to be transient.
Each autoreclosing function is configured to co-operatewith the synchrocheck function.
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/ordelayed three pole autoreclosing.
Apparatus control APCM13444-3 v13
The apparatus control functions are used for control andsupervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors andearthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate isgiven after evaluation of conditions from other
functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operatorplace selection and external or internal blockings.
Apparatus control features:• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation• Selection and supervision of operator place• Command supervision• Block/deblock of operation• Block/deblock of updating of position indications• Substitution of position and quality indications• Overriding of interlocking functions• Overriding of synchrocheck• Operation counter• Suppression of mid position
Two types of command models can be used:• Direct with normal security• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security
Normal security means that only the command isevaluated and the resulting position is not supervised.Enhanced security means that the command isevaluated with an additional supervision of the statusvalue of the control object. The command sequence withenhanced security is always terminated by aCommandTermination service primitive and anAddCause telling if the command was successful or ifsomething went wrong.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMIwith authority control if so defined.
InterlockingM13531-3 v4
The interlocking function blocks the possibility tooperate primary switching devices, for instance when adisconnector is under load, in order to prevent materialdamage and/or accidental human injury.
Each apparatus control function has interlockingmodules included for different switchyardarrangements, where each function handles interlockingof one bay. The interlocking function is distributed toeach IED and is not dependent on any central function.For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicatevia the system-wide interbay bus (IEC 61850-8-1) or byusing hard wired binary inputs/outputs. Theinterlocking conditions depend on the circuitconfiguration and apparatus position status at anygiven time.
For easy and safe implementation of the interlockingfunction, the IED is delivered with standardized andtested software interlocking modules containing logicfor the interlocking conditions. The interlockingconditions can be altered, to meet the customer’s
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
36 ABB
specific requirements, by adding configurable logic bymeans of the graphical configuration tool.
Switch controller SCSWIM13486-3 v7
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervisesall functions to properly select and operate switchingprimary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handleand operate on one three-phase device or up to threeone-phase devices.
Circuit breaker SXCBRM13489-3 v6
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide theactual status of positions and to perform the controloperations, that is, pass all the commands to primaryapparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binaryoutput boards and to supervise the switching operationand position.
Circuit switch SXSWIM16492-3 v6
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is toprovide the actual status of positions and to performthe control operations, that is, pass all the commands toprimary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors orearthing switches via binary output boards and tosupervise the switching operation and position.
Reservation function QCRSVM13506-3 v4
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily totransfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safeway and to prevent double operation in a bay,switchyard part, or complete substation.
Reservation input RESINM16501-3 v5
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives thereservation information from other bays. The number ofinstances is the same as the number of involved bays(up to 60 instances are available).
Bay control QCBAYM13447-3 v7
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together withLocal remote and local remote control functions tohandle the selection of the operator place per bay.QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can bedistributed to different apparatuses within the bay.
Local remote LOCREM/Local remote controlLOCREMCTRL
M17086-3 v8
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are connected via the function blocksLOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAYfunction block. The parameter ControlMode in functionblock LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals arecoming from the local HMI or from an external hardwareswitch connected via binary inputs.
Logic rotating switch for function selection andLHMI presentation SLGAPC
SEMOD114908-4 v9
The logic rotating switch for function selection andLHMI presentation SLGAPC (or the selector switch
function block) is used to get an enhanced selectorswitch functionality compared to the one provided by ahardware selector switch. Hardware selector switchesare used extensively by utilities, in order to havedifferent functions operating on pre-set values.Hardware switches are however sources formaintenance issues, lower system reliability and anextended purchase portfolio. The selector switchfunction eliminates all these problems.
Selector mini switch VSGAPCSEMOD158756-5 v7
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is amultipurpose function used for a variety of applications,as a general purpose switch.
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu or from asymbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.
Generic communication function for Double Pointindication DPGAPC
SEMOD55850-5 v7
Generic communication function for Double Pointindication (DPGAPC) function block is used to senddouble point position indications to other systems,equipment or functions in the substation through IEC61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It isespecially intended to be used in the interlockingstation-wide logics.
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPCSEMOD176462-4 v8
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPCfunction block is a collection of 8 single pointcommands, designed to bring in commands fromREMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logicconfiguration that do not need extensive commandreceiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way,simple commands can be sent directly to the IEDoutputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) ofthe result of the commands is supposed to be achievedby other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPCfunction blocks. The commands can be pulsed or steadywith a settable pulse time.
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0AUTOBITS
SEMOD158591-5 v7
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is usedwithin PCM600 to get into the configuration of thecommands coming through the DNP3 protocol. TheAUTOBITS function plays the same role as functionsGOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (forLON).
Single command, 16 signalsM12446-6 v5
The IEDs can receive commands either from asubstation automation system or from the local HMI.The command function block has outputs that can beused, for example, to control high voltage apparatusesor for other user defined functionality.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 37
11. Scheme communication
Scheme communication logic with delta basedblocking scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH
M13860-3 v11
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all linefaults, scheme communication logic is provided. Alltypes of communication schemes for permissiveunderreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking, deltabased blocking, unblocking and intertrip are available.
The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be usedfor scheme communication signaling when included.
Phase segregated scheme communication logic fordistance protection ZC1PPSCH
SEMOD141686-4 v3
Communication between line ends is used to achievefault clearance for all faults on a power line. All possibletypes of communication schemes for example,permissive underreach, permissive overreach andblocking schemes are available. To manage problemswith simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phasesegregated communication is needed. This will thenreplace the standard Scheme communication logic fordistance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) onimportant lines where three communication channels (ineach subsystem) are available for the distanceprotection communication.
The main purpose of the Phase segregated schemecommunication logic for distance protection(ZC1PPSCH) function is to supplement the distanceprotection function such that:
• fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line endfor which the faults are on the part of the line notcovered by its underreaching zone.
• correct phase selection can be maintained to supportsingle-pole tripping for faults occurring anywhere onthe entire length of a double circuit line.
To accomplish this, three separate communicationchannels, that is, one per phase, each capable oftransmitting a signal in each direction is required.
ZC1PPSCH can be completed with the current reversaland WEI logic for phase segregated communication,when found necessary in Blocking and Permissiveoverreaching schemes.
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic fordistance protection ZCRWPSCH
M13896-3 v14
The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversaland weak end infeed logic functions that supplementthe standard scheme communication logic. It is notsuitable for standalone use as it requires inputs fromthe distance protection functions and the schemecommunications function included within the terminal.
On detection of a current reversal, the current reversallogic provides an output to block the sending of theteleprotection signal to the remote end, and to blockthe permissive tripping at the local end. This blockingcondition is maintained long enough to ensure that nounwanted operation will occur as a result of the currentreversal.
On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weakend infeed logic provides an output for sending thereceived teleprotection signal back to the remotesending end and other output(s) for local tripping. Forterminals equipped for single- and two-pole tripping,outputs for the faulted phase(s) are provided.Undervoltage detectors are used to detect the faultedphase(s).
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phasesegregated communication ZC1WPSCH
SEMOD156473-5 v3
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phasesegregated communication (ZC1WPSCH) function isused to prevent unwanted operations due to currentreversal when using permissive overreach protectionschemes in application with parallel lines where theoverreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallelline.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where theapparent power behind the protection can be too low toactivate the distance protection function. Whenactivated, received carrier signal together with localundervoltage criteria and no reverse zone operationgives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is alsoechoed back to accelerate the sending end.
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCHM13823-3 v6
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, whenno communication channel is available, localacceleration logic ZCLCPSCH can be used. This logicenables fast fault clearing and re-closing during certainconditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace acommunication channel.
The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser(zone extension) or by the loss-of-load current (loss-of-load acceleration).
Scheme communication logic for residualovercurrent protection ECPSCH
M13918-4 v10
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on thepart of the line not covered by the instantaneous step ofthe residual overcurrent protection, the directionalresidual overcurrent protection can be supported with alogic that uses communication channels.
In the directional scheme, information of the faultcurrent direction must be transmitted to the other lineend. With directional comparison, a short operate time
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
38 ABB
of the protection including a channel transmission time,can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapidautoreclosing function after the fault clearance.
The communication logic module for directional residualcurrent protection enables blocking as well aspermissive under/overreaching, and unblockingschemes. The logic can also be supported by additionallogic for weak-end infeed and current reversal, includedin Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic forresidual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH function.
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic forresidual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH
M13928-3 v7
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic forresidual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH is asupplement to Scheme communication logic for residualovercurrent protection ECPSCH.
To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on theline, the directional earth fault protection function canbe supported with logic that uses tele-protectionchannels.
This is why the IEDs have available additions to thescheme communication logic.
M13928-6 v2
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars atboth terminals, overreaching permissive communicationschemes can trip unselectively due to fault currentreversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy linewhen a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack ofsecurity can result in a total loss of interconnectionbetween the two buses. To avoid this type ofdisturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transientblocking logic) can be used.
M13928-8 v5
Permissive communication schemes for residualovercurrent protection can basically operate only whenthe protection in the remote IED can detect the fault.The detection requires a sufficient minimum residualfault current, out from this IED. The fault current can betoo low due to an opened breaker or high-positiveand/or zero-sequence source impedance behind thisIED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed(WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo islimited to 200 ms to avoid channel lockup.
Direct transfer trip DTTLow active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC
GUID-25A2A94F-09FE-4552-89F8-CF22632A7A0D v2
Low active power and power factor protection(LAPPGAPC) function measures power flow. It can beused for protection and monitoring of:
• phase wise low active power• phase wise low power factor• phase wise reactive power and apparent power as
service values
Following features are available:
• Definite time stage for low active power protection• Definite time stage for low power factor protection• Individual enabling of Low active power and Low
power factor functions• Low active power trip with 2 selection modes '1 out of
3' and '2 out of 3'• Phase wise calculated values of apparent power,
reactive power, active power and power factor areavailable as service values
• Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current
Compensated over and undervoltage protectionCOUVGAPC
GUID-229EB419-0903-46FA-9192-BBB35725C841 v2
Compensated over and undervoltage protection(COUVGAPC) function calculates the remote end voltageof the transmission line utilizing local measured voltage,current and with the help of transmission lineparameters, that is, line resistance, reactance,capacitance and local shunt reactor. For protection oflong transmission line for in zone faults, COUVGAPCcanbe incorporated with local criteria within direct transfertrip logic to ensure tripping of the line only underabnormal conditions.
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOCGUID-413851A9-5EB7-4C48-8F5D-E30E470EFFAF v2
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC)function is a fast way of finding any abnormality in linecurrents. When there is a fault in the system, the currentchanges faster than the voltage. SCCVPTOC findsabnormal condition based on phase-to-phase currentvariation. The main application is as a local criterion toincrease security when transfer trips are used.
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRCGUID-79AB9B9E-9200-44D7-B4EE-57C9E7BB74A9 v2
In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CRsignal gives the trip to the circuit breaker after checkingcertain local criteria functions in order to increase thesecurity of the overall tripping functionality. Carrierreceive logic (LCCRPTRC) function gives final trip outputof the DTT scheme.
Features:
• Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme• Blocking function output on CR Channel Error• Phase wise trip outputs
Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOVGUID-C5CBB6A2-780D-4008-98E3-455A404D32CB v2
Negative sequence components are present in all typesof fault condition. Negative sequence voltage andcurrent get high values during unsymmetrical faults.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 39
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOVGUID-4CF3EC6A-D286-4808-929B-C9302418E4ED v2
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormalconditions involving earth. They can reach considerablyhigh values during earth faults.
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOCGUID-C4F99554-88BC-4F11-9EFE-91BCA6ED1261 v2
Negative sequence components are present in all typesof fault condition. They can reach considerably highvalues during abnormal operation.
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOCGUID-F0C38DA1-2F39-46DE-AFFE-F919E6CF4A57 v2
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormalconditions involving earth. They have a considerablyhigh value during earth faults.
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOCGUID-AC4FF35E-5D86-421E-82C7-93F600E9F453 v2
Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is designed forovercurrent conditions.
Features:
• Phase wise start and trip signals• Overcurrent protection• Phase wise RMS current is available as service values• Single definite time stage trip function.
Three phase undercurrent LCPCPTUCGUID-E8EA5CE8-ED7A-4FA3-9DAC-83227D53387F v2
Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC) isdesigned for detecting loss of load conditions.
Features:
• Phase wise start and trip signals• Phase wise RMS current is available as service values• Single definite time stage trip function
12. Logic
Tripping logic SMPPTRCM12275-3 v10
A function block for protection tripping is alwaysprovided as basic for each circuit breaker involved in thetripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulseprolongation to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length,as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block also includes a settable latchfunctionality for evolving faults and breaker lock-out.
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPCM15321-3 v11
The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to routetrip signals and other logical output signals to differentoutput contacts on the IED.
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals andthese outputs can be connected to physical tripping
outputs according to the specific application needs forsettable pulse or steady output.
Group alarm logic function ALMCALHGUID-16E60E27-F7A8-416D-8648-8174AAC49BB5 v3
The group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used toroute several alarm signals to a common indication, LEDand/or contact, in the IED.
Group warning logic function WRNCALHGUID-F7D9A012-3AD4-4D86-BE97-DF2A99BE5383 v3
The group warning logic function WRNCALH is used toroute several warning signals to a common indication,LED and/or contact, in the IED.
Group indication logic function INDCALHGUID-D8D1A4EE-A87F-46C6-8529-277FC1ADA9B0 v3
The group indication logic function INDCALH is used toroute several indication signals to a common indication,LED and/or contact, in the IED.
Basic configurable logic blocksM11396-4 v15
The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagatethe time stamp and quality of signals (have no suffix QTat the end of their function name). A number of logicblocks and timers are always available as basic for theuser to adapt the configuration to the specificapplication needs. The list below shows a summary ofthe function blocks and their features.
These logic blocks are also available as part of anextension logic package with the same number ofinstances.
• AND function block. Each block has four inputs andtwo outputs where one is inverted.
• GATE function block is used for whether or not asignal should be able to pass from the input to theoutput.
• INVERTER function block that inverts one input signalto the output.
• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay theoutput signal one execution cycle.
• OR function block. Each block has up to six inputs andtwo outputs where one is inverted.
• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example,for pulse extensions or limiting of operation ofoutputs, settable pulse time.
• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can resetor set an output from two inputs respectively. Eachblock has two outputs where one is inverted. Thememory setting controls if, after a power interruption,the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it hadbefore the power interruption. RESET input haspriority.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
40 ABB
• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set orreset an output from two inputs respectively. Eachblock has two outputs where one is inverted. Thememory setting controls if, after a power interruption,the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it hadbefore the power interruption. The SET input haspriority.
• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayedoutputs related to the input signal. The timer has asettable time delay.
• XOR function block. Each block has two outputs whereone is inverted.
Extension logic packageGUID-144BAAA3-A5EF-49AF-8876-93CC5F3D0234 v1
The logic extension block package includes additionaltrip matrix logic and configurable logic blocks.
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMIpresentation SLGAPC
SEMOD114908-4 v9
The logic rotating switch for function selection andLHMI presentation SLGAPC (or the selector switchfunction block) is used to get an enhanced selectorswitch functionality compared to the one provided by ahardware selector switch. Hardware selector switchesare used extensively by utilities, in order to havedifferent functions operating on pre-set values.Hardware switches are however sources formaintenance issues, lower system reliability and anextended purchase portfolio. The selector switchfunction eliminates all these problems.
Selector mini switch VSGAPCSEMOD158756-5 v7
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is amultipurpose function used for a variety of applications,as a general purpose switch.
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu or from asymbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.
Fixed signal function blockM15322-3 v11
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configurationof an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in otherfunction blocks to a certain level/value, or for creatingcertain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, stringtypes of signals are available.
One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression andoverflow supervision (TEIGAPC)
GUID-2D64874A-F266-4251-8EED-E813F40513D7 v2
The Elapsed time integrator function TEIGAPC is afunction that accumulates the elapsed time when agiven binary signal has been high.
The main features of TEIGAPC
• Applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9seconds).
• Supervision of limit transgression conditions andoverflow.
• Possibility to define a warning or alarm with theresolution of 10 milliseconds.
• Retaining of the integration value.• Possibilities for blocking and reset.• Reporting of the integrated time.
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16ISEMOD175725-4 v4
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used totransform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into aninteger.
Boolean to integer conversion with logical noderepresentation, 16 bit BTIGAPC
SEMOD175781-4 v8
Boolean to integer conversion with logical noderepresentation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to transform aset of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer. Theblock input will freeze the output at the last value.
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16SEMOD158373-5 v5
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used totransform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical)signals.
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic noderepresentation ITBGAPC
SEMOD158421-5 v8
Integer to boolean conversion with logic noderepresentation function ITBGAPC is used to transforman integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 andreceived by the function to 16 binary coded (logic)output signals.
ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values overIEC 61850 when the R/L (Remote/Local) push button onthe front HMI, indicates that the control mode for theoperator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacentto R is lit ), and the corresponding signal is connected tothe input PSTO ITBGAPC function block. The inputBLOCK will freeze the output at the last received valueand blocks new integer values to be received andconverted to binary coded outputs.
Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMPGUID-A93564FA-0017-4939-A9C1-095DA0FD9832 v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level ofinteger values in the system relative to each other or toa fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can beused for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and otherlogics.
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMPGUID-E17A88D7-D095-4F36-9CD5-64EBFD2A1DEA v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level ofreal value signals in the system relative to each other orto a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that canbe used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking andother logics.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 41
13. Monitoring
Measurements CVMMXN, CMMXU, VNMMXU,VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI
M12024-3 v8
The measurement functions are used to get on-lineinformation from the IED. These service values make itpossible to display on-line information on the local HMIand on the Substation automation system about:
• measured voltages, currents, frequency, active,reactive and apparent power and power factor
• measured analog values from merging units• primary phasors• positive, negative and zero sequence currents and
voltages• mA, input currents• pulse counters
Supervision of mA input signalsM16054-3 v2
The main purpose of the function is to measure andprocess signals from different measuring transducers.Many devices used in process control represent variousparameters such as frequency, temperature and DCbattery voltage as low current values, usually in therange 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.
Alarm limits can be set and used as triggers, e.g. togenerate trip or alarm signals.
The function requires that the IED is equipped with themA input module.
Disturbance report DRPRDREM12153-3 v11.1.1
Complete and reliable information about disturbances inthe primary and/or in the secondary system togetherwith continuous event-logging is accomplished by thedisturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED,acquires sampled data of all selected analog input andbinary signals connected to the function block with a,maximum of 40 analog and 128 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common namefor several functions:
• Event list• Indications• Event recorder• Trip value recorder• Disturbance recorder• Fault locator
The Disturbance report function is characterized bygreat flexibility regarding configuration, startingconditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input tothe AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks, which are set totrigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signalsfrom start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault timewill be included in the recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED inthe standard Comtrade format as a reader file HDR, aconfiguration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The sameapplies to all events, which are continuously saved in aring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get informationabout the recordings. The disturbance report files maybe uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using thedisturbance handling tool.
Event list DRPRDREM12412-6 v8
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring thesystem from an overview perspective and is acomplement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The event list logs all binary input signals connected tothe Disturbance recorder function. The list may containup to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
Indications DRPRDREM12030-3 v6
To get fast, condensed and reliable information aboutdisturbances in the primary and/or in the secondarysystem it is important to know, for example binarysignals that have changed status during a disturbance.This information is used in the short perspective to getinformation via the local HMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow andred), which will display status information about the IEDand the Disturbance recorder function (triggered).
The Indication list function shows all selected binaryinput signals connected to the Disturbance recorderfunction that have changed status during a disturbance.
Event recorder DRPRDREM12033-3 v8
Quick, complete and reliable information aboutdisturbances in the primary and/or in the secondarysystem is vital, for example, time-tagged events loggedduring disturbances. This information is used fordifferent purposes in the short term (for examplecorrective actions) and in the long term (for examplefunctional analysis).
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signalsconnected to the Disturbance recorder function. Eachrecording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
The event recorder information is available for thedisturbances locally in the IED.
The event recording information is an integrated part ofthe disturbance record (Comtrade file).
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
42 ABB
Trip value recorder DRPRDREM12128-3 v7
Information about the pre-fault and fault values forcurrents and voltages are vital for the disturbanceevaluation.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of allselected analog input signals connected to theDisturbance recorder function. The result is magnitudeand phase angle before and during the fault for eachanalog input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for thedisturbances locally in the IED.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated partof the disturbance record (Comtrade file).
Disturbance recorder DRPRDREM12156-3 v10
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast,complete and reliable information about disturbances inthe power system. It facilitates understanding systembehavior and related primary and secondary equipmentduring and after a disturbance. Recorded information isused for different purposes in the short perspective (forexample corrective actions) and long perspective (forexample functional analysis).
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data fromselected analog- and binary signals connected to theDisturbance recorder function (maximum 40 analog and128 binary signals). The binary signals available are thesame as for the event recorder function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and isnot dependent on the operation of protection functions.It can record disturbances not detected by protectionfunctions. Up to ten seconds of data before the triggerinstant can be saved in the disturbance file.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100disturbances are saved in the IED and the local HMI isused to view the list of recordings.
Event functionM12805-6 v9
When using a Substation Automation system with LONor SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sentat change or cyclically from the IED to the station level.These events are created from any available signal in theIED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT). Theevent function block is used for LON and SPAcommunication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferredthrough EVENT function.
Generic communication function for Single Pointindication SPGAPC
SEMOD55713-5 v7
Generic communication function for Single Pointindication SPGAPC is used to send one single logicalsignal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
Generic communication function for Measured ValueMVGAPC
SEMOD55872-5 v9
Generic communication function for Measured ValueMVGAPC function is used to send the instantaneousvalue of an analog signal to other systems or equipmentin the substation. It can also be used inside the sameIED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and topermit measurement supervision on that value.
Measured value expander block RANGE_XPSEMOD52450-4 v7
The current and voltage measurements functions(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU), current andvoltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI andVMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/Ofunctions (MVGAPC) are provided with measurementsupervision functionality. All measured values can besupervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, lowlimit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure valueexpander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced toenable translating the integer output signal from themeasuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-lowlimit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or abovehigh-high limit. The output signals can be used asconditions in the configurable logic or for alarmingpurpose.
Gas medium supervision SSIMGGUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v5
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used for monitoringthe circuit breaker condition. Binary information basedon the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used asinput signals to the function. In addition, the functiongenerates alarms based on received information.
Liquid medium supervision SSIMLGUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v5
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used for monitoringthe circuit breaker condition. Binary information basedon the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as inputsignals to the function. In addition, the functiongenerates alarms based on received information.
Breaker monitoring SSCBRGUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v10
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used tomonitor different parameters of the breaker condition.The breaker requires maintenance when the number ofoperations reaches a predefined value. For a properfunctioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential tomonitor the circuit breaker operation, spring chargeindication or breaker wear, travel time, number ofoperation cycles and estimate the accumulated energyduring arcing periods.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 43
Fault locator LMBRFLOM13970-3 v12
The accurate fault locator is an essential component tominimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or topin-point a weak spot on the line.
The fault locator is an impedance measuring functiongiving the distance to the fault in km, miles or % of linelength. The main advantage is the high accuracyachieved by compensating for load current and for themutual zero-sequence effect on double circuit lines.
The compensation includes setting of the remote andlocal sources and calculation of the distribution of faultcurrents from each side. This distribution of faultcurrent, together with recorded load (pre-fault)currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position.The fault can be recalculated with new source data atthe actual fault to further increase the accuracy.
Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the sourcevoltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart, theaccuracy can be still maintained with the advancedcompensation included in fault locator.
Event counter with limit supervison L4UFCNTGUID-13157EAB-1686-4D2E-85DF-EC89768F3572 v5
The 30 limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settablecounter with four independent limits where the numberof positive and/or negative flanks on the input signalare counted against the setting values for limits. Theoutput for each limit is activated when the countedvalue reaches that limit.
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.
Running hour-meter TEILGAPCGUID-464FB24F-B367-446C-963A-A14841943B87 v2
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is afunction that accumulates the elapsed time when agiven binary signal has been high.
The main features of TEILGAPC are:
• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9hours)
• Supervision of limit transgression conditions androllover/overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with theresolution of 0.1 hours
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart• Possibilities for blocking and reset• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time• Reporting of the accumulated time
14. Metering
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT
M13394-3 v7
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externallygenerated binary pulses, for instance pulses comingfrom an external energy meter, for calculation of energyconsumption values. The pulses are captured by thebinary input module and then read by the PCFCNTfunction. A scaled service value is available over thestation bus. The special Binary input module withenhanced pulse counting capabilities must be orderedto achieve this functionality.
Function for energy calculation and demandhandling (ETPMMTR)
GUID-6898E29B-DA70-421C-837C-1BBED8C63A7A v2
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used tomeasure active as well as reactive power values.Function for energy calculation and demand handling(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power asinput and calculates the accumulated active and reactiveenergy pulses, in forward and reverse direction. Energyvalues can be read or generated as pulses. Maximumdemand power values are also calculated by thefunction. This function includes zero point clamping toremove noise from the input signal. As output of thisfunction: periodic energy calculations, integration ofenergy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarmsignals for limit violation of energy values and maximumpower demand, can be found.
The values of active and reactive energies are calculatedfrom the input power values by integrating them over aselected time tEnergy. The integration of active andreactive energy values will happen in both forward andreverse directions. These energy values are available asoutput signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration ofenergy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACCand STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset toinitial values with RSTACC input.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powersare calculated for the set time interval tEnergy andthese values are updated every minute through outputchannels. The active and reactive maximum powerdemand values are calculated for both forward andreverse direction and these values can be reset withRSTDMD input.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
44 ABB
15. Human machine interface
Local HMIAMU0600442 v14
IEC13000239-2-en.vsd
IEC13000239 V2 EN-US
Figure 16. Local human-machine interface
The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:• Graphical display capable of showing a user defined
single line diagram and provide an interface forcontrolling switchgear.
• Navigation buttons and five user defined commandbuttons to shortcuts in the HMI tree or simplecommands.
• 15 user defined three-color LEDs.• Communication port for PCM600.
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.
16. Basic IED functions
Time synchronizationM11344-3 v11
The time synchronization function is used to select acommon source of absolute time for the synchronizationof the IED when it is a part of a protection system. Thismakes it possible to compare events and disturbancedata between all IEDs within a station automationsystem and in between sub-stations.
17. Station communication
Communication protocolsM14815-3 v12
Each IED is provided with a communication interface,enabling it to connect to one or many substation levelsystems or equipment, either on the SubstationAutomation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Available communication protocols are:
• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol• IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol• LON communication protocol• SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol• DNP3.0 communication protocol
Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocolM14787-3 v12
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting inPCM600. The IED is equipped with single or doubleoptical Ethernet rear ports (order dependent) for IEC61850-8-1 station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1communication is also possible from the electricalEthernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allowsintelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from differentvendors to exchange information and simplifies systemengineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSEand client-server communication over MMS aresupported. Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE)uploading can be done over MMS or FTP.
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocolGUID-C3AA21B4-730F-4327-943A-3C77102A80A0 v2
Single optical Ethernet port communication standardIEC 61850-9-2LE for process bus is provided. IEC61850-9-2LE allows Non Conventional InstrumentTransformers (NCIT) with Merging Units (MU) or standalone Meging Units to exchange information with theIED and simplifies SA engineering.
LON communication protocolSEMOD120140-5 v2
Existing stations with ABB station bus LON can beextended with use of the optical LON interface. Thisallows full SA functionality including peer-to-peermessaging and cooperation between the IEDs.
SPA communication protocolSEMOD120134-5 v1
A single glass or plastic port is provided for the ABB SPAprotocol. This allows extensions of simple substationautomation systems but the main use is for SubstationMonitoring Systems SMS.
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocolSEMOD120137-5 v3
A single glass or plastic port is provided for the IEC60870-5-103 standard. This allows design of simplesubstation automation systems including equipmentfrom different vendors. Disturbance files uploading isprovided.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 45
DNP3.0 communication protocolSEMOD153688-5 v1
An electrical RS485 and an optical Ethernet port isavailable for the DNP3.0 communication. DNP3.0 Level 2communication with unsolicited events, timesynchronizing and disturbance reporting is provided forcommunication to RTUs, Gateways or HMI systems.
Multiple command and transmitM14791-3 v3
When IEDs are used in Substation Automation systemswith LON, SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communicationprotocols, the Event and Multiple Command functionblocks are used as the communication interface forvertical communication to station HMI and gateway, andas interface for horizontal peer-to-peer communication(over LON only).
IEC 62439-3 Parallel Redundancy ProtocolGUID-A90FDBA7-D4D7-4CBD-9F05-13DCC9971779 v5
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 parallelredundancy protocol (PRP) are available as options whenordering IEDs. Redundant station bus communicationaccording to IEC 62439-3 uses both port AB and port CDon the OEM module.
18. Remote communication
Analog and binary signal transfer to remote endM12449-6 v2
Three analog and eight binary signals can be exchangedbetween two IEDs. This functionality is mainly used forthe line differential protection. However it can be usedin other products as well. An IED can communicate withup to 4 remote IEDs.
Binary signal transfer to remote end, 192 signalsM13458-3 v4
If the communication channel is used for transfer ofbinary signals only, up to 192 binary signals can beexchanged between two IEDs. For example, thisfunctionality can be used to send information such asstatus of primary switchgear apparatus or intertrippingsignals to the remote IED. An IED can communicate withup to 4 remote IEDs.
Line data communication module, short, mediumand long range LDCM
SEMOD168481-4 v7
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used forcommunication between the IEDs situated at distances<110 km/68 miles or from the IED to optical to electricalconverter with G.703 or G.703E1 interface located on adistances < 3 km/1.9 miles away. The LDCM modulesends and receives data, to and from another LDCMmodule. The IEEE/ANSI C37.94 standard format is used.
Galvanic X.21 line data communication module X.21-LDCM
GUID-3C6C7DAC-1DB1-4CB8-991F-3B1D86551F28 v3
A module with built-in galvanic X.21 converter which e.g.can be connected to modems for pilot wires is alsoavailable.
Galvanic interface G.703 resp G.703E1M16035-3 v4
The external galvanic data communication converterG.703/G.703E1 makes an optical-to-galvanic conversionfor connection to a multiplexer. These units aredesigned for 64 kbit/s resp 2Mbit/s operation. Theconverter is delivered with 19” rack mountingaccessories.
19. Hardware description
Hardware modulesIP14529-1 v1
Power supply module PSMM11595-3 v5
The power supply module is used to provide the correctinternal voltages and full isolation between the IED andthe battery system. An internal fail alarm output isavailable.
Binary input module BIMM1769-3 v4
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputsand is available in two versions, one standard and onewith enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputsto be used with the pulse counter function. The binaryinputs are freely programmable and can be used for theinput of logical signals to any of the functions. They canalso be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive monitoringand evaluation of operation of the IED and for allassociated electrical circuits.
Binary output module BOMM6938-3 v4
The binary output module has 24 independent outputrelays and is used for trip output or any signalingpurpose.
Static binary output module SOMSEMOD174196-4 v4
The static binary output module has six fast staticoutputs and six change over output relays for use inapplications with high speed requirements.
Binary input/output module IOMM6939-3 v6
The binary input/output module is used when only a fewinput and output channels are needed. The ten standardoutput channels are used for trip output or any signalingpurpose. The two high speed signal output channels areused for applications where short operating time isessential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater forrequired binary input information.
mA input module MIMM15020-3 v4
The milli-ampere input module is used to interfacetransducer signals in the –20 to +20 mA range from forexample OLTC position, temperature or pressure
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
46 ABB
transducers. The module has six independent,galvanically separated channels.
Optical ethernet module OEMM16073-3 v6
The optical fast-ethernet module is used for fast andinterference-free communication of synchrophasor dataover IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 protocols. It is alsoused to connect an IED to the communication buses (likethe station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol(OEM rear port A, B). The process bus use the IEC61850-9-2LE protocol (OEM rear port C, D). The modulehas one or two optical ports with ST connectors.
Serial and LON communication module SLM, supportsSPA/IEC 60870-5-103, LON and DNP 3.0
M14933-3 v4
The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is usedfor SPA, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and LONcommunication. The module has two opticalcommunication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glassor glass/glass. One port is used for serialcommunication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port)and one port is dedicated for LON communication.
Line data communication module LDCMM16075-3 v4
Each module has one optical port, one for each remoteend to which the IED communicates.
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode),Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range(850 nm multi mode) are available.
Galvanic X.21 line data communication module X.21-LDCMGUID-D02150FC-54F5-4CE4-8D3D-9F8796B6A527 v3
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module isused for connection to telecommunication equipment,for example leased telephone lines. The modulesupports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.
Examples of applications:
• Line differential protection• Binary signal transfer
Galvanic RS485 serial communication moduleSEMOD158664-5 v3
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) isused for DNP3.0 and IEC 60870-5-103 communication.The module has one RS485 communication port. TheRS485 is a balanced serial communication that can beused either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wireconnection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is amultidrop communication with no dedicated Master orslave. This variant requires however a control of theoutput. The 4-wire connection has separated signals forRX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicatedMaster and the rest are slaves. No special control signalis needed in this case.
GPS time synchronization module GTMM14851-3 v5
This module includes a GPS receiver used for timesynchronization. The GTM has one SMA contact for
connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPSST-connector output.
IRIG-B Time synchronizing moduleSEMOD141113-4 v7
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used foraccurate time synchronizing of the IED from a stationclock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used forsynchronizing when IEC 61850-9-2LE is used.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and12X IRIG-B support.
Transformer input module TRMM14875-3 v9
The transformer input module is used to galvanicallyseparate and adapt the secondary currents and voltagesgenerated by the measuring transformers. The modulehas twelve inputs in different combinations of currentsand voltage inputs.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression typecan be ordered.
High impedance resistor unitM16727-3 v2
The high impedance resistor unit, with resistors forpick-up value setting and a voltage dependent resistor,is available in a single phase unit and a three phase unit.Both are mounted on a 1/1 19 inch apparatus plate withcompression type terminals.
Layout and dimensionsIP14539-1 v1
DimensionsIP14826-1 v1M15243-4 v6
CB
D
E
A
IEC08000163-2-en.vsdIEC08000163 V2 EN-US
Figure 17. Case with rear cover
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 47
xx08000165.vsd
JG
F
K
H
IEC08000165 V1 EN-US
Figure 18. Case with rear cover and 19” rack mounting kit
IEC06000182-2-en.vsdIEC06000182 V2 EN-US
Figure 19. A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6.
M15243-12 v7
Case size(mm)/(inches)
A B C D E F G H J K
6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9/10.47
223.7/8.81
242.1/9.53
255.8/10.07
205.7/8.10
190.5/7.50
203.7/8.02
- 228.6/9.00
-
6U, 3/4 x 19” 265.9/10.47
336.0/13.23
242.1/9.53
255.8/10.07
318.0/12.52
190.5/7.50
316.0/12.4
- 228.6/9.00
-
6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9/10.47
448.3/17.65
242.1/9.53
255.8/10.07
430.3/16.86
190.5/7.50
428.3/16.86
465.1/18.31
228.6/9.00
482.6/19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.
Mounting alternativesM16079-3 v12
• 19” rack mounting kit• Flush mounting kit with cut-out dimensions:
– 1/2 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 210.1 mm/8.27”
– 3/4 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 322.4 mm/12.69”
– 1/1 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 434.7 mm/17.11”
• Wall mounting kit
See ordering for details about available mountingalternatives.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
48 ABB
20.
Connection diagrams
Connection diagramsGUID-CF4EFFA5-3081-4FC7-9A14-ED127C3C0FDE v3
The connection diagrams are delivered on the IEDConnectivity package DVD as part of the productdelivery.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can bedownloaded fromhttp://www.abb.com/substationautomation.
Connection diagrams for Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.11MRK002801-AF
Connection diagrams for Configured products
Connection diagram, RED670 2.1, A31 1MRK002803-HA
Connection diagram, RED670 2.1, B31 1MRK002803-HB
Connection diagram, RED670 2.1, A32 1MRK002803-HC
Connection diagram, RED670 2.1, B32 1MRK002803-HD
Connection diagrams for Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.1 1MRK002802-AF
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 49
21. Technical data
GeneralIP11376-1 v2M10993-1 v3
Definitions
Reference value The specified value of an influencing factor to which are referred the characteristics of the equipment
Nominal range The range of values of an influencing quantity (factor) within which, under specified conditions, the equipment meetsthe specified requirements
Operative range The range of values of a given energizing quantity for which the equipment, under specified conditions, is able toperform its intended functions according to the specified requirements
Presumptions for Technical DataGUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v2
The technical data stated in this document are only validunder the following circumstances:
1. Main current transformers with 1 A or 2 A secondaryrating are wired to the IED 1 A rated CT inputs.
2. Main current transformer with 5 A secondary ratingare wired to the IED 5 A rated CT inputs.
3. CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance withthe associated main instrument transformers. Notethat for functions which measure an analogue signalwhich do not have corresponding primary quantitythe 1:1 ratio shall be set for the used analogue inputson the IED. Example of such functions are: HZPDIF,ROTIPHIZ and STTIPHIZ.
4. Parameter IBase used by the tested function is setequal to the rated CT primary current.
5. Parameter UBase used by the tested function is setequal to the rated primary phase-to-phase voltage.
6. Parameter SBase used by the tested function is setequal to:– √3 × IBase × UBase
7. The rated secondary quantities have the followingvalues:– Rated secondary phase current Ir is either 1 A or 5 A
depending on selected TRM.– Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage Ur is
within the range from 100 V to 120 V.– Rated secondary power for three-phase system Sr =
√3 × Ur × Ir
8. For operate and reset time testing, the defaultsetting values of the function are used if not explicitlystated otherwise.
9. During testing, signals with rated frequency havebeen injected if not explicitly stated otherwise.
Energizing quantities, rated values and limitsIP15765-1 v2
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
50 ABB
Analog inputsIP15842-1 v1M16988-1 v11
Table 7. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A
Operating range (0-100) x Ir
Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)30 × Ir for 10 s10 × Ir for 1 min4 × Ir continuously
Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave
Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V
Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 51
Table 8. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1A 5 A
Operating range (0-1.8) × Ir (0-1.6) × Ir
Thermal withstand 80 × Ir for 1 s25 × Ir for 10 s10 × Ir for 1 min1.8 × Ir for 30 min1.1 × Ir continuously
65 × Ir for 1 s20 × Ir for 10 s8 × Ir for 1 min1.6 × Ir for 30 min1.1 × Ir continuously
Burden < 200 mVA at Ir < 350 mVA at Ir
Voltage inputs *)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V
Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V< 80 mVA at 220 V
*) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
M6389-1 v4
Table 9. MIM - mA input module
Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:
Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -
Input range ±5, ±10, ±20mA0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
-
Power consumptioneach mA-boardeach mA input
£ 2 W£ 0.1 W
-
SEMOD55310-2 v8
Table 10. OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels 1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC 61850-8-1 / IEEE C37.118 and port C, D for IEC 61850-9-2LE / IEEEC37.118)
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fiber
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
52 ABB
Auxiliary DC voltageIP15843-1 v3M12286-1 v4
Table 11. PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 - 60) VEL = (90 - 250) V
EL ±20%EL ±20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -
Binary inputs and outputsIP15844-1 v1M12576-1 v8.1.1
Table 12. BIM - Binary input module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V48/60 V110/125 V220/250 V
RL ±20%RL ±20%RL ±20%RL ±20%
Power consumption24/30 V, 50 mA48/60 V, 50 mA110/125 V, 50 mA220/250 V, 50 mA220/250 V, 110 mA
max. 0.05 W/inputmax. 0.1 W/inputmax. 0.2 W/inputmax. 0.4 W/inputmax. 0.5 W/input
-
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 HzRelease settable 1–30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1–20 ms
Binary input operate time(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)
3 ms -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 53
Maximum 176 binary input channelsmay be activated simultaneously withinfluencing factors within nominalrange.
The stated operate time for functionsinclude the operating time for thebinary inputs and outputs.
M50609-2 v9
Table 13. BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V48/60 V110/125 V220/250 V
RL ±20%RL ±20%RL ±20%RL ±20%
Power consumption24/30 V48/60 V110/125 V220/250 V
max. 0.05 W/inputmax. 0.1 W/inputmax. 0.2 W/inputmax. 0.4 W/input
-
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 HzRelease settable 1–30 Hz
*Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms
Binary input operate time(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)
3 ms -
* Note: For compliance with surge immunity a debounce filter time setting of 5 ms is required.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
54 ABB
Maximum 176 binary input channelsmay be activated simultaneously withinfluencing factors within nominalrange.
The stated operate time for functionsinclude the operating time for thebinary inputs and outputs.
M12573-1 v8.1.1
Table 14. IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 8 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V48/60 V110/125 V220/250 V
RL ±20%RL ±20%RL ±20%RL ±20%
Power consumption24/30 V, 50 mA48/60 V, 50 mA110/125 V, 50 mA220/250 V, 50 mA220/250 V, 110 mA
max. 0.05 W/inputmax. 0.1 W/inputmax. 0.2 W/inputmax. 0.4 W/inputmax. 0.5 W/input
-
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 HzRelease settable 1-30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms
Binary input operate time(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)
3 ms -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 55
Maximum 176 binary input channelsmay be activated simultaneously withinfluencing factors within nominalrange.
The stated operate time for functionsinclude the operating time for thebinary inputs and outputs.
M12318-1 v10
Table 15. IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallelreed relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24VDC —
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC
Current carrying capacityPer relay, continuousPer relay, 1 sPer process connector pin, continuous
8 A10 A12 A
8 A10 A12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms 0.2 s1.0 s
30 A10 A
0.4 A0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load 0.2 s1.0 s
30 A10 A
220–250 V/0.4 A110–125 V/0.4 A48–60 V/0.2 A24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A125 V/0.35 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A125 V/0.35 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Max operations with load 1000
Max operations with no load 10000
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
56 ABB
Maximum 72 outputs may be activatedsimultaneously with influencing factorswithin nominal range. After 6 ms anadditional 24 outputs may beactivated. The activation time for the96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48outputs can be activated during 1 s.Continued activation is possible withrespect to current consumption butafter 5 minutes the temperature risewill adversely affect the hardware life.Maximum two relays perBOM/IOM/SOM should be activatedcontinuously due to power dissipation.
The stated operate time for functionsinclude the operating time for thebinary inputs and outputs.
M12584-1 v10
Table 16. IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24VDC -
Test voltage across opencontact, 1 min
250 V rms 250 V rms
Current carrying capacityPer relay, continuousPer relay, 1 sPer process connector pin,continuous
8 A10 A12 A
8 A10 A12 A
Making capacity at inductiveloadwith L/R > 10 ms0.2 s1.0 s
30 A10 A
0.4 A0.4 A
Making capacity at resistiveload 0.2 s1.0 s
30 A10 A
220–250 V/0.4 A110–125 V/0.4 A48–60 V/0.2 A24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j> 0.4
250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC withL/R < 40 ms
48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Max operations with load 1000 -
Max operations with no load 10000 -
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 57
Maximum 72 outputs may be activatedsimultaneously with influencing factorswithin nominal range. After 6 ms anadditional 24 outputs may beactivated. The activation time for the96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48outputs can be activated during 1 s.Continued activation is possible withrespect to current consumption butafter 5 minutes the temperature risewill adversely affect the hardware life.Maximum two relays perBOM/IOM/SOM should be activatedcontinuously due to power dissipation.
The stated operate time for functionsinclude the operating time for thebinary inputs and outputs.
SEMOD175395-2 v9
Table 17. SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity Static binary output trip
Rated voltage 48-60 VDC 110-250 VDC
Number of outputs 6 6
Impedance open state ~300 kΩ ~810 kΩ
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min No galvanic separation No galvanic separation
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 5 A 5 A
1.0 s 10 A 10 A
Making capacity at capacitive load with themaximum capacitance of 0.2 μF :
0.2 s 30 A 30 A
1.0 s 10 A 10 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A
60 V/0.75 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 1 ms < 1 ms
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
58 ABB
Table 18. SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Electromechanical relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC
Min load voltage 24VDC
Number of outputs 6
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 8 A
1.0 s 10 A
Max operations with load 1000
Max operations with no load 10000
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitanceof 0.2 μF:
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 6 ms
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 59
The stated operate time for functionsinclude the operating time for thebinary inputs and outputs.
M12441-1 v10
Table 19. BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Min load voltage 24VDC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacityPer relay, continuousPer relay, 1 sPer process connector pin, continuous
8 A10 A12 A
Max operations with load 1000
Max operations with no load 10000
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms0.2 s1.0 s
30 A10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A125 V/0.35 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 6 ms
The stated operate time for functionsinclude the operating time for thebinary inputs and outputs.
Influencing factorsIP15846-1 v1M16705-1 v15
Table 20. Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, operatevalue
+20°C -25°C to +55°C 0.02%/°C
Relative humidityOperative range
10-90%0-95%
10-90% -
Storage temperature - -40°C to +70°C -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
60 ABB
Table 21. Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation
Dependence on Reference value Within nominalrange
Influence
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltageOperative range
max. 2%Full waverectified
15% of EL 0.01%/%
Auxiliary voltage dependence,operate value
±20% of EL 0.01%/%
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage
24-60 V DC ± 20% 100-250 V DC ±20%
Interruptioninterval0–50 ms
No restart
0–∞ s Correct behaviour at power down
Restart time < 300 s
Table 22. Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)
Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hzfr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
±1.0%/Hz
Frequency dependence for distance protection operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hzfr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
±2.0%/Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content) 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%
Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10%content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
Harmonic frequency dependence for high impedance differentialprotection (10% content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
Harmonic frequency dependence for overcurrent protection 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±3.0%
Type tests according to standardsIP15778-1 v1M16706-1 v13.1.1
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 61
Table 23. Electromagnetic compatibility
Test Type test values Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave immunity test 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
Surge withstand capability test 2.5 kV, oscillatory4.0 kV, fast transient
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Electrostatic dischargeDirect applicationIndirect application
15 kV air discharge8 kV contact discharge8 kV contact discharge
IEC 60255-26 IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Electrostatic dischargeDirect applicationIndirect application
15 kV air discharge8 kV contact discharge8 kV contact discharge
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV2 kV, MIM mA-inputs
IEC 60255-26, Zone AIEC 60255-26, Zone B
Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50ms high energy1-2 kV, BOM and IRF outputs
IEC 60255-26, Zone AIEC 60255-26, Zone B
Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Conducted common mode immunity test 15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s100 A/m, cont.
IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Class V
Damped oscillatory magnetic field test 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz 1.4-2.7 GHz
IEC 60255-26
Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 20 V/m80-1000 MHz10 V/m, 5.1-6.0 GHz
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2 EN 50121-5
Conducted electromagnetic field disturbance 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
Table 24. Insulation
Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min.1.0 kVrms, 1 min.)
IEC 60255-27ANSI C37.90IEEE 802.3-2015,Environment AImpulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50ms, 0.5 J
1 kV, 1.2/50 ms 0.5 J
Insulation resistance > 100 MW at 500 VDC
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
62 ABB
Table 25. Environmental tests
Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C to +70°C IEC 60068-2-14
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40°C and humidity 93% IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55°C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle= 24 hours)
IEC 60068-2-30
Table 26. CE compliance
Test According to
Immunity EN 60255–26
Emissivity EN 60255–26
Low voltage directive EN 60255–27
Table 27. Mechanical tests
Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 63
Differential protectionM13062-1 v16.1.1
Table 28. Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic Adaptable ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% -
Minimum pickup, IdMin (4.0-100.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Directional characteristic Fixed 180 degrees or ±60 to±90 degrees
±2.0 degrees
Operate time, trip at 0 to 10 xIdMin
Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time, trip at 10 to 0 xIdMin
Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Second harmonic blocking 40.0% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir
M13081-1 v12
Table 29. High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (10-900) VI=U/R
±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -
Maximum continuous power U>Trip2/SeriesResistor ≤200 W -
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min. = 5 msMax. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 x Ud to 0 Min. = 75 msMax. = 95 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Ud Min. = 25 msMax. = 35 ms
Reset time at 2 x Ud to 0 Min. = 50 msMax. = 70 ms
Critical impulse time 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
64 ABB
M16023-1 v11
Table 30. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF single IED without communication
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -
SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% -
EndSection 1 (20–150)% of IBase -
EndSection 2 (100–1000)% of IBase -
Unrestrained limit function (100–5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of IrNote: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir
Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±2.0% of IrNote: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir
*Inverse characteristics, see table173,175 and table 177
16 curve types See table 173,175 and table 177
Critical impulse time 2ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -
Charging current compensation On/Off -
LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :
*Operate time, restrained function at0 to 10 x IdMin
Min. = 25 msMax. = 35 ms
-
*Reset time, restrained function at 10x IdMinto 0
Min. = 5 msMax. = 15 ms
-
*Operate time, unrestrained functionat 0 to 10 x IdUnre
Min. = 5 msMax. = 15 ms
-
*Reset time, unrestrained function at10 x IdUnreto 0
Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
**Operate time, unrestrained negativesequence function
Min. = 10 msMax. = 25 ms
-
**Reset time, unrestrained negativesequence function
Min. = 10 msMax. = 30 ms
-
L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):
*Operate time, restrained function at0 to 10 x IdMin
Min. = 10 msMax. = 20 ms
-
*Reset time, restrained function at 10x IdMinto 0
Min. = 15 msMax. = 25 ms
-
*Operate time, unrestrained functionat 0 to 10 x IdUnre
Min. = 5 msMax. = 15 ms
-
*Reset time, unrestrained function at10 x IdUnreto 0
Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 65
Table 30. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF single IED without communication , continued
Function Range or value Accuracy
**Operate time, unrestrained negativesequence function
Min. = 10 msMax. = 20 ms
-
**Reset time, unrestrained negativesequence function
Min. = 10 msMax. = 35 ms
-
The data in the table are valid for a single IED with two local current input groups.*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group.**Note: Data obtained with two three-phase input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on both sides as pre- andpost-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double on one side and decreasing same phase current tozero on the other side.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
66 ABB
Table 31. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF with 64 Kbit/s communication
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±4.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±4.0% of I at I > Ir
SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -
SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% -
EndSection 1 (20–150)% of IBase -
EndSection 2 (100–1000)% of IBase -
Unrestrained limit function (100–5000)% of IBase ±4.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±4.0% of I at I > Ir
Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±3.0% of IrNote: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir
Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±10.0% of IrNote: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir
*Inverse characteristics, see table173,175 and table 177
16 curve types See table 173,175 and table 177
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -
Charging current compensation On/Off -
LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :
*Operate time, restrained function at0 to 10 x IdMin
Min. = 30 msMax. = 50 ms
-
*Reset time, restrained function at 10x IdMinto 0
Min. = 10 msMax. = 25 ms
-
*Operate time, unrestrained functionat 0 to 10 x IdUnre
Min. = 10 msMax. = 25 ms
-
*Reset time, unrestrained function at10 x IdUnreto 0
Min. = 20 msMax. = 40 ms
-
**Operate time, unrestrained negativesequence function
Min. = 15 msMax. = 35 ms
-
**Reset time, unrestrained negativesequence function
Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):
*Operate time, restrained function at0 to 10 x IdMin
Min. = 10 msMax. = 30 ms
-
*Reset time, restrained function at 10x IdMinto 0
Min. = 20 msMax. = 45 ms
-
*Operate time, unrestrained functionat 0 to 10 x IdUnre
Min. = 10 msMax. = 25 ms
-
*Reset time, unrestrained function at10 x IdUnreto 0
Min. = 20 msMax. = 50 ms
-
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 67
Table 31. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF with 64 Kbit/s communication , continued
Function Range or value Accuracy
**Operate time, unrestrained negativesequence function
Min. = 15 msMax. = 35 ms
-
**Reset time, unrestrained negativesequence function
Min. = 15 msMax. = 40 ms
-
The data in the table are valid for a single IED with 64 Kbits/s communication in the loop-back mode.*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group. The operate and reset times for L3CPDIF are valid for an static outputfrom SOM.**Note: Data obtained with two three-phase input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on both sides as pre- andpost-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double on one side and decreasing same phase current tozero on the other side.
GUID-0BD8D3C9-620A-426C-BDB5-DAA0E4F8247F v4
Table 32. Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, zero sequence current (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate current, low current operation (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate voltage, phase to neutral (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate voltage, phase to phase (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay, zero sequence current at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 mswhichever is greater
Independent time delay, low current operation at 2 x Iset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 40 mswhichever is greater
Independent time delay, low voltage operation at 2 x Uset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 mswhichever is greater
Reset time delay for startup signal at 0 to 2 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 mswhichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
68 ABB
Impedance protectionM13842-1 v15
Table 33. Distance measuring zone, Quad ZMQPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectabledirection
-
Minimum operate residualcurrent, zone 1
(5-1000)% of IBase -
Minimum operate current,phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth
(10-1000)% of IBase -
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy±2.0 degrees static angular accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x IrAngle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth
(0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase
(0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degreesmeasured with CVT’sand 0.5<SIR<30
-
Definite time delay Ph-Ph andPh-E operation
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2x Zreach
Min. = 20 msMax. = 50 ms
-
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 69
SEMOD173239-2 v10
Table 34. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate residualcurrent, zone 1
(5-1000)% of IBase -
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph and Ph-E
(10-1000)% of IBase -
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy±2.0 degrees static angular accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x IrAngle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.01-9000.00) Ω/phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measuredwith CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
-
Definite time delay Ph-Ph andPh-E operation
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is greater
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2x Zreach
Min. = 20 msMax. = 50 ms
-
M16024-1 v11
Table 35. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reactive reach, positivesequence
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.5% static accuracy±2.0 degrees static angular accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x IrAngle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach, positivesequence
(0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase
Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth faults, forward andreverse
(1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase faults, forward andreverse
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop
Load encroachment criteria:Load resistance, forward andreverseSafety load impedance angle
(1.00–3000.00) Ω/phase(5-70) degrees
Reset ratio 105% typically -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
70 ABB
SEMOD173242-2 v13
Table 36. Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones, Ph-E Max 5 with selectabledirection
-
Minimum operate current (10–30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence impedance,Ph-E loop
(0.005–3000.000) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x IrAngle: 85 degrees
Positive sequence impedanceangle, Ph-E loop
(10–90) degrees
Reverse reach, Ph-E loop(Magnitude)
(0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase
Magnitude of earth returncompensation factor KN
(0.00–3.00)
Angle for earth compensationfactor KN
(-180–180) degrees
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degreesmeasured with CVT’s and0.5<SIR<30
-
Definite time delay Ph-Ph andPh-E operation
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±60 ms whichever is greater
Operate time 22 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.5 to 1.5 xZreach
Min. = 30 msMax. = 45 ms
-
SEMOD173249-2 v7
Table 37. Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (10-30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy±2.0 degrees static angular accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x IrAngle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.50-9000.00) Ω/phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) W/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measuredwith CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
-
Definite time delay Ph-Ph andPh-E operation
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 71
SEMOD153649-2 v7
Table 38. Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Load encroachment criteria:Load resistance, forward andreverse
(1.00–3000.00) W/phase(5–70) degrees
±2.0% static accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1–1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5–30) x IrAngle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
GUID-7617A215-AE7C-47CC-B189-4914F530F717 v7
Table 39. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 withselectable direction
-
Minimum operate residualcurrent, zone 1
(5-1000)% of IBase -
Minimum operate current,phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth
(10-1000)% of IBase -
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase
±2.0% static accuracy±2.0 degrees static angular accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x IrAngle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth
(0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase
(0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degreesmeasured with CVT’sand 0.5<SIR<30
-
Definite time delay phase-phase and phase-earthoperation
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2x Zreach
Min. = 20 msMax. =50 ms
-
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
72 ABB
GUID-9E13C38A-3B6D-402B-98A6-6CDA20632CE7 v4
Table 40. Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FRPSPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reactive reach, positivesequence
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy±2.0 degrees static angular accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x IrAngle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach, positivesequence
(0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase
Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E faults,forward and reverse
(1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults,forward and reverse
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop
Load encroachment criteria:Load resistance, forward andreverseSafety load impedance angle
(1.00–3000.00) Ω/phase(5-70) degrees
Reset ratio 105% typically -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 73
GUID-6C2EF52A-8166-4A23-9861-38931682AA7D v7
Table 41. High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 selectabledirections, 3 fixeddirections
-
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph and Ph-E
(5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Positive sequence reactancereach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
(0.01 - 3000.00)ohm/p
Pseudo continuous ramp:±2.0% of set valueConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x IrAngle: At 0 degrees and 85 degreesIEC 60255-121 points A,B,C,D,E
Ramp of shots:±2.0% of set valueConditions:IEC 60255-121 point B
Positive sequence resistancereach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
(0.00 - 1000.00)ohm/p
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00)ohm/p
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00)ohm/p
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Eand Ph-Ph
(0.01 -9000.00)ohm/l
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 degreesmeasured with CVTsand 0.5 < SIR < 30,IEC 60255-121
-
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Directional blinders Forward: -15 – 120degreesReverse: 165 – -60degrees
Pseudo continuous ramp:±2.0 degrees, IEC 60255-121
Resistance determining theload impedance area - forward
(0.01 - 5000.00)ohm/p
Pseudo continuous ramp:±2.0% of set valueConditions:Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees
Ramp of shots:±5.0% of set valueConditions:Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees
Angle determining the loadimpedance area
5 - 70 degrees Pseudo continuous ramp:±2.0 degreesConditions:Tested at RLdFw = 20 ohm/p
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-Eand Ph-Ph operation
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% of set value or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Operate time 16 ms typically, IEC60255-121
-
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
74 ABB
GUID-16656307-6B43-47B5-8817-48638FFB5999 v3
Table 42. Distance zones quad with high speed distance for series compensated networks ZMFCPDIS
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 selectabledirections, 3 fixeddirections
-
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph and Ph-E
(5 - 6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of In
Positive sequence reactancereach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
(30 - 3000) Ω/phase
" +- 2.0% static accuracy +- 2.0 deg static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltagerange: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir Angle: At 0 deg and 85 deg"
Positive sequence resistancereach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
(30 - 3000) Ω/phase
Zero sequence reactance reach (100.00 - 9000.00)Ω/p
Zero sequence resistive reach (15.00 - 3000.00)Ω/p
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Eand Ph-Ph
(1.00 - 9000.00) Ω/l
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 degmeasured with CVT'sand 0.5 < SIR <30
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-Eand Ph-Ph operation
(0.000 - 60.000) s±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Operate time 16 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms-
Max = 35 ms
Reset ratio 105% typically -
M16036-1 v10
Table 43. Power swing detection ZMRPSB
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase
±2.0% static accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x IrAngle: at 0 degrees and 85 degreesResistive reach (0.10–1000.00) W/loop
Power swing detectionoperate time
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is greater
Second swing reclaim operatetime
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Minimum operate current (5-30)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 75
SEMOD171935-5 v5
Table 44. Power swing logic PSLPSCH
Function Range or value Accuracy
Permitted maximumoperating time differencebetween higher and lowerzone
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Delay for operation ofunderreach zone withdetected difference inoperating time
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Conditional timer forsending the CS at powerswings
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Conditional timer fortripping at power swings
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Timer for blocking theoverreaching zones trip
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
GUID-88E02516-1BFE-4075-BEEB-027484814697 v2
Table 45. Pole slip protection PSPPPAM
Function Range or value Accuracy
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/Ir
Zone 1 and Zone 2 tripcounters
(1 - 20) -
SEMOD175136-2 v8
Table 46. Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM
Function Range or value Accuracy
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/(√3 ⋅ Ir)
Rotor start angle (90.0 - 130.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees
Rotor trip angle (15.0 - 90.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 tripcounters
(1 - 20) -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
76 ABB
GUID-BACA37F7-E945-40BC-BF9D-A65BFC96CA91 v8
Table 47. Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, phase-to-phaseand phase-to-neutralundervoltage
(1 - 100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -
Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -
Independent time delay forresidual current at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
Independent time delay forresidual voltage at 0.8 x Uset to1.2 x Uset
(0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
Independent dropoff-delay forresidual voltage at 1.2 x Uset to0.8 x Uset
(0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
Operating mode No Filter, NoPrefCyclic: 1231c, 1321cAcyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a
M16043-1 v11
Table 48. Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF
Parameter Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1–100)% ofUBase
±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, detection of dead line (1–100)% ofIBase
±1.0% of Ir
Time delay to operate for the switch onto faultfunction
(0.03-120.00) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Time delay for UI detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Delay time for activation of dead line detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Drop-off delay time of switch onto fault function (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 77
Current protectionM12336-1 v11
Table 49. Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5msMax. = 15ms
-
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25msMax. = 40 ms
-
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
78 ABB
M12342-1 v21
Table 50. Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% oflBase
-
Minimum operate current, step 1-4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step1-4
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Minimum operate time for inverse curves ,step 1-4
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Inverse time characteristics, see table 172,table 174 and table 176
16 curve types See table 172, table 174 and table 176
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to2 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset
to 0Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to10 x Iset
Min. = 5 msMax. = 20 ms
-
Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset
to 0Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
Operate frequency, directional overcurrent 38-83 Hz -
Operate frequency, non-directionalovercurrent
10-90 Hz -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 79
M12340-2 v8
Table 51. Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 msMax. = 15 ms
-
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
80 ABB
M15223-1 v18
Table 52. Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% ofIBase
-
Relay characteristic angle(RCA)
(-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±2.5% of I at I > Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset,step 1-4
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Minimum operate time for inverse curves,step 1-4
(0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Inverse time characteristics, see Table 172,Table 174 and Table 176
16 curve types See Table 172, Table 174 and Table 176
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Real part of source Z used for currentpolarization
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase -
Imaginary part of source Z used forcurrent polarization
(0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
*Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset
to 0Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0to 10 x Iset
Min. = 5 msMax. = 20 ms
-
*Reset time, start non-directional at 10 xIset to 0
Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
*Note: Operate time and reset time are only valid if harmonic blocking is turned off for a step.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 81
GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v5
Table 53. Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -
Independent time delay at 0to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 4
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Minimum operate time forinverse curves, step 1 - 4
(0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Inverse time characteristics,see table 172, table 174 andtable 176
16 curve types See table 172, table 174 andtable 176
Minimum operate current,step 1 - 4
(1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Relay characteristic angle(RCA)
(-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Operate current fordirectional release
(1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±2.5% of I at I > Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Real part of negativesequence source impedanceused for current polarization
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase -
Imaginary part of negativesequence source impedanceused for current polarization
(0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 10 x Iset
Min. = 5 msMax. = 20 ms
-
Reset time, start non-directional at 10 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
82 ABB
SEMOD173350-2 v13
Table 54. Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate level for 3I0·cosjdirectional residualovercurrent
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate level for ·3I0·3U0
cosj directional residualpower
(0.25-200.00)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr
±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Operate level for 3I0 and jresidual overcurrent
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at £ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate level for non-directional overcurrent
(1.00-400.00)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate level for non-directional residualovervoltage
(1.00-200.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Residual release current forall directional modes
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Residual release voltage forall directional modes
(1.00-300.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Operate time for non-directional residualovercurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 40 ms
Max. = 65 ms
Reset time for non-directional residualovercurrent at 2 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 40 ms
Max. = 65 ms
Operate time for directionalresidual overcurrent at 0 to2 x Iset
Min. = 110 ms
Max. = 160 ms
Reset time for directionalresidual overcurrent at 2 to0 x Iset
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 60 ms
Independent time delay fornon-directional residualovervoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 xUset
(0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever isgreater
Independent time delay fornon-directional residualovercurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever isgreater
Independent time delay fordirectional residualovercurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 170 ms whichever isgreater
Inverse characteristics, seetable "", table "" and table ""
16 curve types See table "", table "" and table ""
Relay characteristic angle(RCADir)
(-179 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle(ROADir)
(0 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 83
M12352-1 v15
Table 55. Thermal overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reference current (2-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 - 600)°F ±1.0°C, ±2.0°F
Operate time:
2 2
2 2
ln p
Trip Amb
ref
ref
I It
T TI I
T
σ,
<,
, √
EQUATION13000039 V3 EN-US (Equation 1)
TTrip= set operate temperatureTAmb = ambient temperatureTref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load currentI = actual measured currentIp = load current before overload occurs
Time constant t = (1–1000)minutes
IEC 60255-149, ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever is greater
Alarm temperature (0-200)°C, (0-400)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
Operate temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
Reset level temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
M12353-1 v13
Table 56. Breaker failure protection CCRBRF
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -
Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -
Phase current level for blocking of contactfunction
(5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -
Time delay for re-trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Time delay for back-up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Time delay for back-up trip at multi-phasestart at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Additional time delay for a second back-up tripat 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
84 ABB
M12350-1 v11
Table 57. Stub protection STBPTOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whicheveris greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 msMax. = 20 ms
-
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 10 msMax. = 20 ms
-
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
M13279-1 v9
Table 58. Pole discordance protection CCPDSC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Independent time delaybetween trip condition andtrip signal
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 25 ms whichever is greater
SEMOD175152-2 v10
Table 59. Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power levelfor Step 1 and Step 2
(0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
±1.0% of S at S > Sr
where
1.732r r rS U I= × ×
Characteristic anglefor Step 1 and Step 2
(-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Independent time delay to operate for Step1 and Step 2 at 2 to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000
(0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 85
SEMOD175159-2 v8
Table 60. Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power levelfor Step 1 and Step 2
(0.0–500.0)% of SBase
±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Characteristic anglefor Step 1 and Step 2
(-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Operate time, start at 0.5 to 2 x Sr andk=0.000
Min. =10 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0.5 x Sr andk=0.000
Min. = 35 ms
Max. = 55 ms
Independent time delay to operate for Step1 and Step 2 at 0.5 to 2 x Sr and k=0.000
(0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
SEMOD175200-2 v7
Table 61. Broken conductor check BRCPTOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Unbalance current operation (50–90)% of maximum current ±1.0% of Ir
Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min. = 25 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Reset time at current change from 0 toIr
Min. = 5 msMax. = 20 ms
-
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
86 ABB
Voltage protectionM13290-1 v14
Table 62. Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Internal blocking level, step 1 and step 2 (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Inverse time characteristics for step 1 and step 2, seetable 179
- See table 179
Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 to 0 x Uset (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever isgreater
Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 to 0 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever isgreater
Minimum operate time, inverse characteristics (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever isgreater
Operate time, start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Operate time, start at 1.2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 5 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0 x Uset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 87
M13304-1 v12
Table 63. Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 and 2, seetable 178
- See table 178
Definite time delay, low step (step 1) at 0 to 1.2 x Uset (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever isgreater
Definite time delay, high step (step 2) at 0 to 1.2 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever isgreater
Minimum operate time, Inverse characteristics (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever isgreater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Reset time, start at 1.2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 5 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
88 ABB
M13317-2 v12
Table 64. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, step 1 and step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, seetable 180
- See table 180
Definite time delay low step (step 1) at 0 to 1.2 x Uset (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever isgreater
Definite time delay high step (step 2) at 0 to 1.2 x Uset (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever isgreater
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever isgreater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Reset time, start at 1.2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 5 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
M13338-2 v11
Table 65. Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start (100–180)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U
Operate value, alarm (50–120)% of start level ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Operate value, high level (100–200)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U
Curve type IEEE or customer defined
2
(0.18 ):
( 1)k
IEEE tM
×=
-
EQUATION1319 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)
where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)
±5.0 % or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
Minimum time delay for inversefunction
(0.000–60.000) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
Maximum time delay for inversefunction
(0.00–9000.00) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
Alarm time delay (0.00–9000.00) ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 89
SEMOD166919-2 v6
Table 66. Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarmand trip
(2.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay forvoltage differential alarm at0.8 to 1.2 x UDAlarm
(0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Independent time delay forvoltage differential trip at 0.8to 1.2 x UDTrip
(0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Independent time delay forvoltage differential reset at 1.2to 0.8 x UDTrip
(0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
SEMOD175210-2 v6
Table 67. Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Pulse timer whendisconnecting all three phases
(0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Time delay for enabling thefunctions after restoration
(0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Operate time delay whendisconnecting all three phases
(0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Time delay to block when allthree phase voltages are notlow
(0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
GUID-C172D5EB-51E8-4FC9-B2E7-EF976872FD7E v5
Table 68. Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Residual current detection (10 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% at (50 - 150)% of IBase -
Operate time, residual current detection at0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, residualcurrent detection at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Voltage based phase selection (30 - 100)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur
Reset ratio <115% -
Operate time, voltage based phaseselection at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset
Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, voltagebased phase selection at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset
(0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
90 ABB
Frequency protectionM13360-1 v13
Table 69. Underfrequency protection SAPTUF
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function, at symmetricalthree phase voltage
(35.00-75.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
Operate time, start at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02Hz fn = 50 Hz
Min. = 80 ms
-Max. = 95 ms
fn = 60 HzMin. = 65 ms
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset - 0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Operate time, definite time function at fset +0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz
(0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is greater
Reset time, definite time function at fset - 0.02Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz
(0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is greater
Voltage dependent time delay Settings:UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase
Exponent=0.0-5.0tMax=(0.010–60.000)stMin=(0.010–60.000)s
±1.0% or ±120 ms whichever is greater
( )ExponentU UMin
t tMax tMin tMinUNom UMin
-= × - +
-é ùê úë û
EQUATION1182 V1 EN-US (Equation 3)
U=Umeasured
M14964-1 v12
Table 70. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function at symmetrical three-phase voltage (35.00-90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
Operate time, start at fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hzfn = 50Hz
Min. = 80 msMax. = 95 ms
-
fn = 60 HzMin. = 65 msMax. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Operate time, definite time function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±100 mswhichever is greater
Reset time, definite time function at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±120 ms,whichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 91
M14976-1 v10
Table 71. Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore enable frequency (45.00-65.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever isgreater
Definite time delay for frequency gradient trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever isgreater
Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever isgreater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
92 ABB
Multipurpose protectionM13095-2 v7
Table 72. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Measuring current input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, -NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
-
Measuring voltage input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, -NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
-
Start overcurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Start undercurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Independent time delay, overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Independent time delay, undercurrent at 2 to 0 x Iset, step 1 -2
(0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Overcurrent (non-directional):
Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Start time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 msMax. = 20 ms
-
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Overcurrent:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 172, 174 and table 176 16 curve types See table 172, 174 and table176
Overcurrent:
Minimum operate time for inverse curves, step 1 - 2 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Voltage level where voltage memory takes over (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Start overvoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Start undervoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 93
Table 72. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC , continued
Function Range or value Accuracy
Independent time delay, overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset, step1 - 2
(0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Independent time delay, undervoltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset,step 1 - 2
(0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Overvoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 178 4 curve types See table 178
Undervoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 179 3 curve types See table 179
High and low voltage limit, voltage dependent operation,step 1 - 2
(1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±1.0% of U at U > Ur
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse -
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -
Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
94 ABB
GUID-7EA9731A-8D56-4689-9072-D72D9CDFD795 v7
Table 73. Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start overcurrent at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 msMax. = 20 ms
-
Reset time, start overcurrent at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Inverse time characteristics,see tables 172 and 174
13 curve types See tables 172 and 174
Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristics (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
High voltage limit, voltage dependent operation (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur
Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate time start undervoltage at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time start undervoltage at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, undervoltage at 2 to 0 xUset
(0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Internal low voltage blocking (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur
Overcurrent:Critical impulse timeImpulse margin time
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
-
Undervoltage:Critical impulse timeImpulse margin time
10ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset
15 ms typically
-
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 95
Secondary system supervisionM12358-1 v9
Table 74. Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±10.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, Operate current >90%
Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±5.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase
M16069-1 v11
Table 75. Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Ur
Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir
Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 to 0 x Ur Min. = 10 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
96 ABB
GUID-E2EA8017-BB4B-48B0-BEDA-E71FEE353774 v4
Table 76. Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, block of mainfuse failure
(10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of mainfuse failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Min. = 5 ms –
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fusefailure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilotfuse failure
(10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110% –
Operate time, alarm for pilotfuse failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Min. = 5 ms –
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fusefailure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 97
ControlM12359-1 v12
Table 77. Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check SESRSYN
Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -
Voltage high limit for synchronizing and synchrocheck (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -
Frequency difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
Phase angle difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Voltage difference limit between bus and line for synchronizing andsynchrocheck
(0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Ur
Time delay output for synchrocheck when angle difference betweenbus and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” - 2degrees
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Frequency difference minimum limit for synchronizing (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz
Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing (0.050-0.500) Hz ±2.5 mHz
Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever isgreater
tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing function if no close has beenmade before set time
(0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
Voltage high limit for energizing check (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -
Voltage low limit for energizing check (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -
Maximum voltage for energizing (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Time delay for energizing check when voltage jumps from 0 to 90%of Urated
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever isgreater
Operate time for synchrocheck function when angle differencebetween bus and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees
Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
–
Operate time for energizing function when voltage jumps from 0 to90% of Urated
Min. = 70 msMax. = 90 ms
–
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
98 ABB
M12379-1 v11
Table 78. Autorecloser SMBRREC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of autoreclosing shots 1 - 5 -
Autoreclosing open time:shot 1 - t1 1Phshot 1 - t1 2Phshot 1 - t1 3PhHSshot 1 - t1 3Ph
(0.000-120.000) s
±0.2% or ±35 mswhichever is greater
shot 2 - t2 3Phshot 3 - t3 3Phshot 4 - t4 3Phshot 5 - t5 3Ph
(0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 mswhichever is greater
Extended autorecloser open time (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 mswhichever is greater
Minimum time CB must be closed before AR becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 mswhichever is greater
Maximum operate pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 mswhichever is greater
Reclaim time (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 mswhichever is greater
Circuit breaker closing pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 mswhichever is greater
Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 mswhichever is greater
Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 mswhichever is greater
Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 mswhichever is greater
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 mswhichever is greater
Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 mswhichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 99
Scheme communicationM16038-1 v11
Table 79. Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection ZCPSCH
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type OffIntertripPermissive URPermissive ORBlockingDeltaBlocking
-
Operate voltage, Delta U (0–100)% of UBase ±5.0% of ΔU
Operate current, Delta I (0–200)% of IBase ±5.0% of ΔI
Operate zero sequence voltage,Delta 3U0
(0–100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Δ3U0
Operate zero sequence current,Delta 3I0
(0–200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Δ3I0
Co-ordination time for blockingcommunication scheme
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
Minimum duration of a carriersend signal
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
Security timer for loss of guardsignal detection
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
Operation mode of unblockinglogic
OffNoRestartRestart
-
SEMOD166936-2 v7
Table 80. Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type IntertripPermissive URPermissive ORBlocking
-
Co-ordination time for blockingcommunication scheme
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Minimum duration of a carriersend signal
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
M16039-1 v16
Table 81. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection ZCRWPSCH
Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase-to-neutral voltage
(10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Detection level phase-to-phasevoltage
(10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate time for currentreversal logic
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
100 ABB
SEMOD166938-2 v6
Table 82. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH
Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase toneutral voltage
(10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Detection level phase to phasevoltage
(10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <105% at (20-90)% of UBase -
Operate time for currentreversal
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
M16049-1 v9
Table 83. Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Permissive UnderreachingPermissive OverreachingBlocking
-
Communication schemecoordination time
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
M16051-2 v11
Table 84. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate mode of WEI logic OffEchoEcho & Trip
-
Operate voltage 3U0 for WEItrip
(5-70)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate time for currentreversal logic
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
(0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 101
Direct transfer tripGUID-B5714FAE-A87D-4C2D-A167-6CB3522CE1D5 v4
Table 85. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, low active power (2.0-100.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr
Reset ratio, low active power <105% -
Operate value, low power factor 0.00-1.00 ±0.02
Independent time delay to operate for low active power at1.2 to 0.8 x Pset
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
Independent time delay to operate for low power factor at1.2 to 0.8 x PFset
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
Critical impulse time, low active power 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Pset -
Impulse margin time, low active power 10 ms typically -
GUID-D9EADF1B-5FC7-4FDB-BF38-95BDBC4D7C3D v4
Table 86. Compensated over- and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, undervoltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0,5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.00–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Critical impulse time, undervoltage 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8x Uset -
Impulse margin time, undervoltage 15 ms typically -
Operate value, overvoltage (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur
± 0.5% of U at U>Ur
Critical impulse time, overvoltage 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset -
Impulse margin time, overvoltage 15 ms typically -
Independent time delay for undervoltage functionality at1.2 to 0.8 x Uset
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
Independent time delay for overvoltage functionality at0.8 to 1.2 x Uset
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
GUID-4BF21D95-4517-424E-BC23-6156EA0E253C v4
Table 87. Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, overcurrent (5-100)% of IBase ±2.0% of Ir
Hold time for operate signal at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever isgreater
GUID-C99E063D-B377-40D5-8481-9F46D4166AED v3
Table 88. Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operation mode 1 Out Of 22 Out Of 2
-
Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
102 ABB
GUID-122A206E-27D2-4D15-AD5A-86B68F1ED559 v4
Table 89. Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, negative sequence overvoltage (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur
±0.5% of U at U>Ur
Reset ratio, negative sequence overvoltage >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Critical impulse time, negative sequence overvoltage 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
Impulse margin time, negative sequence overvoltage 15 ms typically -
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 1.2 x Uset (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
GUID-7A8E7F49-F079-42A0-8685-20288FAD5982 v4
Table 90. Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, zero sequence overvoltage (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, zero sequence overvoltage >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Critical impulse time, zero sequence overvoltage 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
Impulse margin time, zero sequence overvoltage 15 ms typically -
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 1.2 x Uset (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 103
GUID-0E964441-43DE-43B6-B454-485FBBF66B5C v4
Table 91. Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, negative sequence overcurrent (3 - 2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, negative sequence overcurrent >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 10 msMax. = 20 ms
-
Reset time, start at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Critical impulse time, negative sequence overcurrent 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
-
Impulse margin time, negative sequence overcurrent 15 ms typically -
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms, whichever isgreater
Transient overreach, start function <5% at τ = 100 ms -
GUID-9F739808-04CA-4988-ABBC-1A444297FDB5 v4
Table 92. Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, zero sequence overcurrent (3-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir±1.0% of I at I>Ir
Reset ratio, zero sequence overcurrent >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 10 msMax. = 20 ms
-
Reset time, start at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Critical impulse time, zero sequence overcurrent 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
-
Impulse margin time, zero sequence overcurrent 15 ms typically -
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever isgreater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
104 ABB
GUID-C4ACE306-2A54-483D-B247-A479D48CBF5F v4
Table 93. Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, overcurrent (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -
Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 msMax. = 35 ms
-
Critical impulse time, overcurrent 5 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
-
Impulse margin time, overcurrent 10 ms typically -
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever isgreater
GUID-CE2C6F0A-DF49-4AAF-80F0-9CDCBB08E755 v4
Table 94. Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, undercurrent (1.00-100.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% at (50.00-100.00)% of IBase -
Start time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 msMax. = 30 ms
-
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 msMax. = 25 ms
-
Critical impulse time, undercurrent 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -
Impulse margin time, undercurrent 10 ms typically -
Independent time delay to operate at 2 to 0 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever isgreater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 105
LogicM12380-1 v9
Table 95. Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Table 96. Number of SMPPTRC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SMPPTRC 6 - -
GUID-3AB1EE95-51BF-4CC4-99BD-F4ECDAACB75A v1
Table 97. Number of TMAGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -
GUID-A05AF26F-DC98-4E62-B96B-E75D19F20767 v1
Table 98. Number of ALMCALH instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5
GUID-70B7357D-F467-4CF5-9F73-641A82D334F5 v1
Table 99. Number of WRNCALH instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5
GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v1
Table 100. Number of INDCALH instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -
GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v1
Table 101. Number of AND instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
106 ABB
GUID-45DF373F-DC39-4E1B-B45B-6B454E8E0E50 v1
Table 102. Number of GATE instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20
GUID-0EC4192A-EF03-47C0-AEC1-09B68B411A98 v1
Table 103. Number of INV instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240
GUID-B2E6F510-8766-4381-9618-CE02ED71FFB6 v1
Table 104. Number of LLD instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20
GUID-35A795D7-A6BD-4669-A023-43C497DBFB01 v1
Table 105. Number of OR instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 69 60 160
GUID-E05E5FB1-23E7-4816-84F2-1FBFFDFF2B43 v1
Table 106. Number of PULSETIMER instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v1
Table 107. Number of RSMEMORY instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v1
Table 108. Number of SRMEMORY instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20
GUID-C6C98FE0-F559-45EE-B853-464516775417 v1
Table 109. Number of TIMERSET instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 107
GUID-0B07F78C-10BD-4070-AFF0-6EE36454AA03 v1
Table 110. Number of XOR instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20
GUID-23D4121A-4C9A-4072-BBE3-6DB076EDAB79 v1
Table 111. Number of ANDQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ANDQT - 20 100
GUID-27DF23C0-A0B2-4BB0-80B5-FC7B7F7FE448 v1
Table 112. Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCOMBSPQT - 10 10
GUID-C1E61AE5-22CF-4198-97CF-8C8043EE96D2 v1
Table 113. Number of INDEXTSPQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDEXTSPQT - 10 10
GUID-77FEBE9B-0882-4E85-8B1A-7671807BFC02 v1
Table 114. Number of INVALIDQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVALIDQT - 6 6
GUID-F25B94C6-9CC9-48A0-A7A3-47627D2B56E2 v1
Table 115. Number of INVERTERQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVERTERQT - 20 100
GUID-88B27B3C-26D2-47AF-9878-CC19018171B1 v1
Table 116. Number of ORQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ORQT - 20 100
GUID-61263951-53A8-4113-82B5-3DB3BF0D9449 v1
Table 117. Number of PULSETIMERQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMERQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
108 ABB
GUID-94C803B4-6C5A-4072-AB5C-20DDE98C9A70 v1
Table 118. Number of RSMEMORYQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORYQT - 10 30
GUID-341562FB-6149-495B-8A63-200DF16A5590 v1
Table 119. Number of SRMEMORYQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORYQT - 10 30
GUID-B6231B97-05ED-40E8-B735-1E1A50FDB85F v1
Table 120. Number of TIMERSETQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSETQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
GUID-1C381E02-6B9E-44DC-828F-8B3EA7EDAA54 v1
Table 121. Number of XORQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XORQT - 10 30
GUID-19810098-1820-4765-8F0B-7D585FFC0C78 v6
Table 122. Number of instances in the extension logic package
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 40 40 100
GATE - - 49
INV 40 40 100
LLD - - 49
OR 40 40 100
PULSETIMER 5 5 49
SLGAPC 10 10 54
SRMEMORY - - 110
TIMERSET - - 49
VSGAPC 10 10 110
XOR - - 49
GUID-65A2876A-F779-41C4-ACD7-7662D1E7F1F2 v1
Table 123. Number of B16I instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 109
GUID-3820F464-D296-4CAD-8491-F3F997359D79 v1
Table 124. Number of BTIGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8
GUID-B45901F4-B163-4696-8220-7F8CAC84D793 v1
Table 125. Number of IB16 instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 6 4 8
GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v1
Table 126. Number of ITBGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8
GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v3
Table 127. Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever isgreater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever isgreater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever isgreater
Table 128. Number of TEIGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4
GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1
Table 129. Running hour-meter TEILGAPC
Function Range or value Accuracy
Time limit for alarm supervision, tAlarm (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
Time limit for warning supervision,tWarning
(0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
110 ABB
MonitoringM12386-1 v14.1.1
Table 130. Measurements CVMMXN
Function Range or value Accuracy
Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ±2.0 mHz
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U≤ 50 V±0.2% of U at U> 50 V
Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir< I < 0.2 x Ir± 0.5% of I at 0.2 x Ir< I < 0.5 x Ir±0.2% of I at 0.5 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir
Active power, P (10 to 300) V(0.1-4.0) x Ir
±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V(0.5-2.0) x Ircos φ> 0.7
±0.2% of P
Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V(0.1-4.0) x Ir
±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V(0.5-2.0) x Ircos φ< 0.7
±0.2% of Q
Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V(0.1-4.0) x Ir
±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V(0.5-2.0) x Ir
±0.2% of S
Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V(0.1-4.0) x Ir
<0.02
(100 to 220) V(0.5-2.0) x Ir
<0.01
GUID-5E04B3F9-E1B7-4974-9C0B-DE9CD4A2408F v5
Table 131. Phase current measurement CMMXU
Function Range or value Accuracy
Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Phase angle at symmetricalload
(0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir
GUID-374C2AF0-D647-4159-8D3A-71190FE3CFE0 v4
Table 132. Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 111
GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v5
Table 133. Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (5 to 175) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (5 to 175) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V
GUID-9B8A7FA5-9C98-4CBD-A162-7112869CF030 v4
Table 134. Current sequence component measurement CMSQI
Function Range or value Accuracy
Current positive sequence, I1Three phase settings
(0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Current zero sequence, 3I0Three phase settings
(0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Current negative sequence, I2Three phase settings
(0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir
GUID-47094054-A828-459B-BE6A-D7FA1B317DA7 v6
Table 135. Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V
M16080-1 v5
Table 136. Supervision of mA input signals
Function Range or value Accuracy
mA measuring function ±5, ±10, ±20 mA0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA
±0.1 % of set value ±0.005 mA
Max current of transducerto input
(-20.00 to +20.00) mA
Min current of transducer toinput
(-20.00 to +20.00) mA
Alarm level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA
Warning level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA
Alarm hysteresis for input (0.0-20.0) mA
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
112 ABB
M12760-1 v9.1.1
Table 137. Disturbance report DRPRDRE
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 168
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internallyderived)
-
Maximum number of binary inputs 128 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording 30 -
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report 96 -
Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording 150 -
Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum numberof channels, typical value)
340 seconds (100 recordings)at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80recordings) at 60 Hz
-
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
-
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -
GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v6
Table 138. Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 113
GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v6
Table 139. Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML
Function Range or value Accuracy
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v9
Table 140. Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR
Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm level for open and close travel time (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
Alarm level for number of operations (0 – 9999) -
Independent time delay for spring chargingtime alarm
(0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Independent time delay for gas pressurealarm
(0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Independent time delay for gas pressurelockout
(0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
CB Contact Travel Time, opening andclosing
±3 ms
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is greater
M14987-1 v6
Table 141. Fault locator LMBRFLO
Function Value or range Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracyConditions:Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Phase selection According to input signals -
Maximum number of faultlocations
100 -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
114 ABB
M12700-1 v4
Table 142. Event list
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing
M13765-1 v5
Table 143. Indications
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance 352
Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100
M12702-1 v4
Table 144. Event recorder
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on timesynchronizing
M13747-1 v5
Table 145. Trip value recorder
Function Value
Buffer capacity
Maximum number of analog inputs 30
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
M12384-1 v6.1.1
Table 146. Disturbance recorder
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40
Maximum number of binary inputs 128
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximumnumber of channels, typical value)
340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz
GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v2
Table 147. Limit counter L4UFCNT
Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 115
MeteringM13404-2 v5
Table 148. Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT
Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report ofcounter value
(1–3600) s -
SEMOD153707-2 v4
Table 149. Energy metering ETPMMTR
Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering kWh Export/Import, kvarhExport/Import
Input from MMXU. No extra error at steady load
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
116 ABB
Station communicationM15031-1 v7
Table 150. Communication protocols
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–19200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
GUID-E8B5405C-241C-4DC2-8AB1-3FA77343A4DE v2
Table 151. IEC 61850-9-2 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-9-2
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
M11927-1 v2
Table 152. LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s
M11901-1 v2
Table 153. SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899
M11921-1 v4
Table 154. IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 117
M12589-1 v4
Table 155. SLM – LON port
Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type STPlastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mmPlastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
SEMOD117441-2 v5
Table 156. SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port
Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type STPlastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mmPlastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
GUID-83EC40D0-ABCF-4292-B3DF-155C3A556B76 v3
Table 157. Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity Range or value
Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch
Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal
Standard CCITT X21
Communication speed 64 kbit/s
Insulation 1 kV
Maximum cable length 100 m
SEMOD158710-2 v2
Table 158. Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity Range or value
Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connectorSoft ground 2-pole connector
GUID-8651FF22-C007-4D53-B7E3-686A30F37CB6 v4
Table 159. IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and Edition 2 parallel redundancy protocol
Function Value
Communication speed 100 Base-FX
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
118 ABB
Remote communication
M12756-1 v12
Table 160. Line data communication module
Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fiber Multi-mode fiberglass 62.5/125 µm Multi-mode fiberglass 50/125 µm
Single-mode fiberglass 9/125 µm
Single-mode fiberglass 9/125 µm
Peak Emission Wave lengthNominalMaximumMinimum
820 nm865 nm792 nm
1310 nm1330 nm1290 nm
1550 nm1580 nm1520 nm
Optical budgetMulti-mode fiber glass 62.5/125 mm
18.8 dB (typicaldistance about 3km/2 mile *)
26.8 dB (typicaldistance 80 km/50mile *)
28.7 dB (typicaldistance 120 km/68mile *)
Multi-mode fiber glass 50/125 mm 11.5 dB (typicaldistance about 2km/1 mile *)
Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC
Protocol C37.94 C37.94implementation **)
C37.94implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / Data rate 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s
Clock source Internal or derivedfrom receivedsignal
Internal or derivedfrom receivedsignal
Internal or derivedfrom received signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation**) C37.94 originally defined just for multi-mode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 119
HardwareIED
SEMOD53385-1 v1M11778-1 v4
Table 161. Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)
M12327-1 v3
Table 162. Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)
Sides, top and bottom IP20
Rear side IP20 with screw compression typeIP10 with ring lug terminals
M11777-1 v4
Table 163. Weight
Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 10 kg/22 lb
6U, 3/4 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb
6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 18 kg/40 lb
Electrical safetyGUID-2825B541-DD31-4DAF-B5B3-97555F81A1C2 v1GUID-1CF5B10A-CF8B-407D-8D87-F4B48B43C2B2 v1
Table 164. Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27
Equipment class I (protective earthed)
Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused bycondensation is to be expected)
Connection systemSEMOD53371-1 v1SEMOD53376-2 v6
Table 165. CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
M12583-1 v5
Table 166. Auxiliary power supply and binary I/O connectors
Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
120 ABB
Because of limitations of space, whenring lug terminal is ordered for BinaryI/O connections, one blank slot isnecessary between two adjacent IOcards. Please refer to the orderingparticulars for details.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 121
Basic IED functionsM11963-1 v5
Table 167. Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out
M12331-1 v7
Table 168. Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), events and sampledmeasurement values
± 1.0 ms typically
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically
SEMOD55660-2 v3
Table 169. GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Receiver – ±1µs relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in newposition or after power loss longer than 1 month
<30 minutes –
Time to reliable time reference after a power losslonger than 48 hours
<15 minutes –
Time to reliable time reference after a power lossshorter than 48 hours
<5 minutes –
SEMOD55693-2 v5
Table 170. GPS – Antenna and cable
Function Value
Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver endTNC in antenna end
Accuracy +/-1μs
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
122 ABB
SEMOD141136-2 v8
Table 171. IRIG-B
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of optical channels 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated– low level– high level
1-3 Vpp3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fiber 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy +/- 1μs
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 123
Inverse characteristicM12388-1 v23
Table 172. ANSI Inverse time characteristics
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic:
( )1P
At B kI
æ öç ÷= + ×ç ÷-è ø
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US
Reset characteristic:
( )2 1= ×
-
trt kI
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.001.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,±2.0% or ±40 mswhichever is greater
ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6
Table 173. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic:
( )1P
At B kI
æ öç ÷= + ×ç ÷-è ø
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US
Reset characteristic:
( )2 1= ×
-
trt kI
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,±5.0% or ±40 mswhichever is greater
ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
124 ABB
Table 174. IEC Inverse time characteristics
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic:
( )1= ×
-
æ öç ÷ç ÷è ø
P
At k
I
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.001.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset
IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristicOperate characteristic:
( )= + ×
-
æ öç ÷ç ÷è ø
P
At B k
I C
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US
Reset characteristic:
( )= ×
-PR
TRt k
I CR
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
The parameter setting Characteristn =Reserved (where, n = 1 - 4) shall not beused, since this parameter setting isfor future use and not implementedyet.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 125
Table 175. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic:
( )1= ×
-
æ öç ÷ç ÷è ø
P
At k
I
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristicOperate characteristic:
( )= + ×
-
æ öç ÷ç ÷è ø
P
At B k
I C
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US
Reset characteristic:
( )= ×
-PR
TRt k
I CR
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
Table 176. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic
1
0.2360.339
= ×
-
t k
IEQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.001.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset
IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
RD type logarithmic inversecharacteristic
5.8 1.35= - ×æ öç ÷è ø
tI
Ink
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
126 ABB
Table 177. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic
1
0.2360.339
= ×
-
t k
IEQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%or ±40 ms whichever isgreater
RD type logarithmic inversecharacteristic
5.8 1.35= - ×æ öç ÷è ø
tI
Ink
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN-US
I = Imeasured/Iset
SEMOD116978-2 v9
Table 178. Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve:
=- >
>
æ öç ÷è ø
tk
U U
UEQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN-US
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 mswhichever is greater
Type B curve:
2.0
480
32 0.5
=⋅
− >⋅ −
0.035+
>
tk
U U
UEQUATION1437-SMALL V2 EN-US
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Type C curve:
3.0
480
32 0.5
=⋅
⋅ −− >
0.035+
>
tk
U U
UEQUATION1438-SMALL V2 EN-US
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Programmable curve:
×= +
- >× -
>
æ öç ÷è ø
P
k At D
U UB C
UEQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN-US
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 127
Table 179. Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve:
=< -
<
æ öç ÷è ø
kt
U U
UEQUATION1431-SMALL V1 EN-US
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 mswhichever is greater
Type B curve:
2.0
4800.055
32 0.5
×= +
< -× -
<
æ öç ÷è ø
kt
U U
UEQUATION1432-SMALL V1 EN-US
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Programmable curve:
×= +
< -× -
<
é ùê úê úê úæ öê úç ÷ë è ø û
P
k At D
U UB C
UEQUATION1433-SMALL V1 EN-US
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
128 ABB
Table 180. Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve:
=- >
>
æ öç ÷è ø
tk
U U
UEQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN-US
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
k = (0.05-1.10) in stepsof 0.01
±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
Type B curve:
2.0
480
32 0.5
=⋅
− >⋅ −
0.035+
>
tk
U U
UEQUATION1437-SMALL V2 EN-US
k = (0.05-1.10) in stepsof 0.01
Type C curve:
3.0
480
32 0.5
=⋅
⋅ −− >
0.035+
>
tk
U U
UEQUATION1438-SMALL V2 EN-US
k = (0.05-1.10) in stepsof 0.01
Programmable curve:
×= +
- >× -
>
æ öç ÷è ø
P
k At D
U UB C
UEQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN-US
k = (0.05-1.10) in stepsof 0.01A = (0.005-200.000) insteps of 0.001B = (0.50-100.00) insteps of 0.01C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of0.1D = (0.000-60.000) insteps of 0.001P = (0.000-3.000) insteps of 0.001
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 129
22. Ordering for customized IEDGUID-79B6B8D2-5EE1-4456-A767-5820B9FA61D7 v4.2.1
Table 181. General guidelines
GuidelinesCarefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.
Table 182. Example ordering code
To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the selection tables, as given in the example below.The selected qty of each table must be filled in, if no selection is possible the code is 0
Example of a complete code: RED670*2.1 - F00X00 - A00000030211111 - B5225255221255221111101000 - C3300032122020022221000300 - D22212 011 - E2220- F4 - S6 - G232 - H20401100000 - K11111111 - L11 - M21 - P01 - B1X0 - AC -MB - B - A3X0 - D1D1ARGN1N1XXXXXXX - AAFXXX - AX
Product definition - Differential protection -
RED670* 2.1 - X00 - A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Impedance protection -
B 0 0 0 0 -
Current protection -
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0 -
Voltage protection - Frequency protection - Multipurposeprotection
- Generalcalculation
-
D 0 1 - E 0 - F - S -
Secondary system supervision - Control -
G - H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Scheme communication - Logic - Monitoring - Station communication -
K - L - M 1 - P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Language
- CasingandMounting
- Connection andpower
- HMI
- Analog input - Binary input/output -
B1
- - - - - -
Remote end serial communication - Serial communication unit for station communication
-
Table 183. Product definition
RED670* 2.1 X00
Table 184. Product definition ordering codes
Product RED670*
Software version 2.1
Configuration alternatives
Line differential protection RED670 F00
Line differential protection RED670 61850-9-2LE N00
Selection:
ACT configuration
No ACT configuration downloaded X00
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
130 ABB
Table 185. Differential protection
Position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 186. Differential functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF 1MRK005904-HA 7 0-3
Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF 1MRK005904-LC 9 0-2
Line differential protection, 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L3CPDIF 1MRK005904-MB 10 0-1 Note:One, andonly onePDIFmust beordered.
Line differential protection, 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends L6CPDIF 1MRK005904-NB 11 0-1
Line differential protection 3 CT sets, with inzone transformers,2-3 line ends
LT3CPDIF 1MRK005904-PB 12 0-1
Line differential protection 6 CT sets, with inzone transformers,3-5 line ends
LT6CPDIF 1MRK005904-RB 13 0-1
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC 1MRK005904-TA 14 0-1
Table 187. Impedance protection
Position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
B 0 0 0 0
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 131
Table 188. Impedance functions, alternatives
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
Note: One, and only one alternative can be selected. Selected qty is 0 for other functions in an unselected alternative.
Alternative 1 Distance protection, quadrilateral
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS,ZMQAPDIS
1MRK005907-AA 1 0-5
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 0-2
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 0-2
Alternative 2 Distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 0-2
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for seriescompensated lines
ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS
1MRK005907-DA 4 0-5
Directional impedance quadrilateral, including seriescompensation
ZDSRDIR 1MRK005907-EA 5 0-2
Alternative 3 Distance protection, mho (mho for phase - phase fault and mho in parallel with quad for earth fault)
Fullscheme distance protection, mho characteristic ZMHPDIS 1MRK005907-FA 6 0-5
Fullscheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS,ZMMAPDIS
1MRK005907-GA 7 0-5
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 0-2
Additional distance protection directional function for earthfaults
ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 0-2
Mho Impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC 1MRK005907-LA 10 0-1
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 0-2
Alternative 4 Distance protection, quadrilateral with separate settings for PP and PE
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 0-2
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separatesettings
ZMRPDIS,ZMRAPDIS
1MRK005907-NA 12 0-5
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS 1MRK005907-PA 13 0-2
Alternative 5 High speed distance protection, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection, quad and mho characteristic ZMFPDIS 1MRK005907-SB 14 0-1
Alternative 6 High speed distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection for series compensated lines,quad and mho characteristic
ZMFCPDIS 1MRK005907-RB 15 0-1
Optional for alternative 1
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 0-2
Optional for alternative 3
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 0-2
Optional for alternatives 1, 2 and 4
Additional distance protection directional function for earthfaults
ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 0-2
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 0-2
Optional with any alternative
Power swing detection ZMRPSB 1MRK005907-UA 16 0-1
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based ZCVPSOF 1MRK005908-AA 17 0-1
Power swing logic PSLPSCH 1MRK005907-VA 18 0-1
PoleSlip/Out-of-step protection PSPPPAM 1MRK005908-CB 19 0-1
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 1MRK005908-GA 20 0-1
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ 1MRK005908-DA 22 0-1
Table 189. Current protection
Position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
132 ABB
Table 190. Current functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC 1MRK005910-AC 1 0-3
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 1MRK005910-BB 2 0-3
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC 1MRK005910-DC 4 0-1
Four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC 1MRK005910-EC 5 0-3
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrentprotection
NS4PTOC 1MRK005910-FB 6 0-2
Sensitive Directional residual over current and power protetcion SDEPSDE 1MRK005910-GA 7 0-1
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celcius LCPTTR 1MRK005911-BA 8 0-2
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Fahrenheit LFPTTR 1MRK005911-AA 9 0-2
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF 1MRK005910-LA 11 0-2
Stub protection STBPTOC 1MRK005910-NA 13 0-2
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 1MRK005910-PA 14 0-2
Directional Underpower protection GUPPDUP 1MRK005910-RA 15 0-2
Directional Overpower protection GOPPDOP 1MRK005910-TA 16 0-2
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC 1MRK005910-SA 17 1
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection VRPVOC 1MRK005910-XA 21 0-3
Table 191. Voltage protection
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D 0 1
Table 192. Voltage functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 1MRK005912-AA 1 0-2
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 1MRK005912-BA 2 0-2
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 1MRK005912-CA 3 0-2
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 1MRK005912-DA 4 0-1
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV 1MRK005912-EA 5 0-2
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV 1MRK005912-GA 7 1
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC 1MRK005912-HA 8 0-1
Table 193. Frequency protection
Position 1 2 3 4
E 00
Table 194. Frequency functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 1MRK005914-AA 1 0-6
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 1MRK005914-BA 2 0-6
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 1MRK005914-CA 3 0-6
Table 195. Multipurpose protection
Position 1
F
Table 196. Multipurpose functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
SelectedQty
Notesand rules
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 1MRK005915-AA 1 0-4
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 133
Table 197. General calculation
Position 1
S
Table 198. General calculation functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
Frequency tracking filter SMAIHPAC 1MRK005915-KA 1 0-6
Table 199. Secondary system supervision
Position 1 2 3
G
Table 200. Secondary system supervision functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
Current circuit supervison CCSSPVC 1MRK005916-AA 1 0-2
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC 1MRK005916-BA 2 0-3
Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference VDSPVC 1MRK005916-CA 3 0-2
Table 201. Control
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 202. Control functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
SelectedQty
Notesand rules
Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing SESRSYN 1MRK005917-AA 1 0-2
Autorecloser SMBRREC 1MRK005917-BA 3 0-4
Apparatus control for single bay, max 10 app. (1CB) incl.Interlocking
APC10 1MRK005917-AY 5 0-1 Note:Only oneApparatus controlcan beordered.
Apparatus control for single bay, max 15 app. (2CBs) incl.Interlocking
APC15 1MRK005917-BY 6 0-1
Table 203. Scheme communication
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
134 ABB
Table 204. Scheme communication functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
Scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrentprotection
ZCPSCH 1MRK005920-AA 1 0-2 Note:Only oneofZCPSCH/ZC1PPSCH can beselectedNote:Only oneofZCRWPSCH/ZC1WPSCH to beselected
Phase segregated Scheme communication logic for distanceprotection
ZC1PPSCH 1MRK005920-BA 2 0-2
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distanceprotection
ZCRWPSCH 1MRK005920-CA 3 0-2
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregatedcommunication
ZC1WPSCH 1MRK005920-DA 4 0-2
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH 1MRK005920-EA 5 0-1
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH 1MRK005920-FA 6 0-1
Current reversal and weakend infeed logic for residual overcurrentprotection
ECRWPSCH 1MRK005920-GA 7 0-1
Direct transfer trip DTT 1MRK005921-AX 8 0-1
Table 205. Logic
Position 1 2
L
Table 206. Logic functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
Configurable logic blocks Q/T 1MRK005922-MX 1 0-1
Extension logic package 1MRK005922-AY 2 0-1
Table 207. Monitoring
Position 1 2
M 1
Table 208. Monitoring functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position
Availableqty
Selectedqty
Notesand rules
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 1MRK005924-HA 1 00-06
Fault locator LMBRFLO 1MRK005925-XB 2 1
Table 209. Station communication
Position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 210. Station communication functions
Function Functionidentification
Ordering no Position Available qty Selected qty Notes and rules
Process Bus communication IEC 61850-9-2 1MRK005930-TA 1 0 if F00 isselected, 6 ifN00 isselected
Note: RED670customized qty= 0, RED67061850-9-2 qty =6
IEC 62439-3 parallel redundancy protocol PRP 1MRK002924-YB 2 1 Note: Not validin RED67061850-9-2LEproductNote: Requires2–channel OEM
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 135
Table 211. Language selection
First local HMI user dialogue language Selection Notes and Rules
HMI language, English IEC B1
Additional HMI language
No additional HMI language X0
HMI language, English US A12
Selected
Table 212. Casing selection
Casing Selection Notes and Rules
1/2 x 19" case A
3/4 19” case 1 TRM slot B
3/4 x 19" case 2 TRM slots C
1/1 x 19” case 1 TRM slot D
1/1 x 19" case 2 TRM slots E
Selected
Table 213. Mounting selection
Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front Selection Notes and Rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case of 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 A
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRGHS6 B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case C
Wall mounting kit D Note: Wall mounting notrecommended withcommunication modules withfiber connection (SLM, OEM,LDCM)
Flush mounting kit E
Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal F
Selected
Table 214. Connection type
Connection type for Power supply module Selection Notes and Rules
Compression terminals M
Ringlug terminals N
Connection type for Input/Output modules
Compression terminals P
Ringlug terminals R
Selected
Table 215. Auxiliary power supply
Selection Notes and Rules
24-60 VDC A
90-250 VDC B
Selected
Table 216. Human machine interface selection
Human machine hardware interface Selection Notes and Rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols B
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols C
Selected
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
136 ABB
Table 217. Analog system selection
Analog system Selection Notes and Rules
No first TRM included X0 Note: Only valid in RED670–N00
Compression terminals A Note: Only the same type ofTRM (compression or ringlug)in the same terminal.
Ringlug terminals B
First TRM 12I 1A, 50/60Hz 1
First TRM 12I 5A, 50/60Hz 2
First TRM 9I+3U 1A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 3
First TRM 9I+3U 5A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 4
First TRM 5I, 1A+4I, 5A+3U, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 5
First TRM 6I+6U 1A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 6
First TRM 6I+6U 5A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 7
First TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz 8 Maximum qty = 1
First TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz 9 Maximum qty = 1
First TRM 7I+5U 1A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 12
First TRM 7I+5U 5A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 13
First TRM 6I, 5A + 1I, 1A + 5U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 14
First TRM 3I, 5A + 4I, 1A + 5U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 15
First TRM 3I, 5A + 3I, 1A + 6U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 16
First TRM 3IM, 1A + 4IP, 1A + 5U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 17
First TRM 3IM, 5A + 4IP, 5A + 5U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 18
No second TRM included X0
Compression terminals A
Ringlug terminals B
Second TRM 12I 1A, 50/60Hz 1
Second TRM 12I 5A, 50/60Hz 2
Second TRM 9I+3U 1A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 3
Second TRM 9I+3U 5A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 4
Second TRM 5I, 1A+4I, 5A+3U, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 5
Second TRM 6I+6U 1A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 6
Second TRM 6I+6U 5A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 7
Second TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz 8 Maximum qty = 1
Second TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz 9 Maximum qty = 1
Second TRM 7I+5U 1A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 12
Second TRM 7I+5U 5A, 100/220V, 50/60Hz 13
Second TRM 6I, 5A + 1I, 1A + 5U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 14
Second TRM 3I, 5A + 4I, 1A + 5U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 15
Second TRM 3I, 5A + 3I, 1A + 6U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 16
Second TRM 3IM, 1A + 4IP, 1A + 5U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 17
Second TRM 3IM, 5A + 4IP, 5A + 5U, 110/220V, 50/60Hz 18
Selected
Table 218. Maximum quantity of I/O modules
When ordering I/O modules, observe the maximum quantities according to the table belowNote: Standard order of location for I/O modules is BIM-BOM-SOM-IOM-MIM from left to right as seen from the rear side of the IED, butcan also be freely placed.Note: The maximum quantity of I/O modules depends on the type of connection terminals.
Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/SOM
MIM Maximum in case
1/1 x 19”, one (1) TRM 14 6 4 4 14 cards, including a combination of four cards of type BOM, SOM and MIM
1/1 x 19”, two (2) TRM 11 6 4 4 11 cards, including a combination of four cards of type BOM, SOM and MIM
3/4 x 19”, one (1) TRM 8 6 4 4 8 cards, including a combination of four cards of type BOM, SOM and maximun oenMIM
3/4 x 19”, two (2) TRM 5 5 4 4 5 cards, including a combination of four cards of type BOM, SOM and maximun oenMIM
1/2 x 19”, one (1) TRM 3 3 3 1 3 cards
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 137
Table 219. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with ringlug terminals
Note: Only every second slot can be used.
Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/SOM
MIM Maximum in case
1/1 x 19” rack casing,one (1) TRM
7 6 4 4 7 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11, P13, P15
1/1 x 19” rack casing,two (2) TRM
5 5 4 4 5 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11
3/4 x 19” rack casing,one (1) TRM
4 4 4 4 4 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9
3/4 x 19” rack casing,two (2) TRM
2 2 2 2 2, possible locations: P3, P5
1/2 x 19” rack casing,one (1) TRM
1 1 1 1 1, possible location: P3
**) including a combination of maximum four modules of type BOM, SOM and MIM
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
138 ABB
Table 220. Binary input/output module selection
Binary input/outputmodules
Selection Notes and Rules
Slot position (rearview) X
31
X41 X51
X61 X71
X81
X91
X10
1
X11
1
X12
1
X13
1
X14
1
X15
1
X16
1 Note! Max 3 positions in 1/2rack, 8 in 3/4 rack with 1TRM, 5in 3/4 rack with 2 TRM, 11 in 1/1rack with 2 TRM and 14 in 1/1rack with 1 TRM
1/2 Case with 1 TRM
3/4 Case with 1 TRM
3/4 Case with 2 TRM
1/1 Case with 1 TRM
1/1 Case with 2 TRM
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output module24 output relays (BOM)
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
BIM 16 inputs, RL24-30VDC, 50 mA
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
BIM 16 inputs, RL48-60VDC, 50 mA
C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
BIM 16 inputs,RL110-125 VDC, 50 mA
D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
BIM 16 inputs,RL220-250 VDC, 50 mA
E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
BIM 16 inputs, 220-250VDC, 120mA
E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
BIMp 16 inputs,RL24-30 VDC, 30 mA,for pulse counting
F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
BIMp 16 inputs,RL48-60 VDC, 30 mA,for pulse counting
G G G G G G G G G G G G G G
BIMp 16 inputs,RL110-125 VDC, 30 mA,for pulse counting
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
BIM 16 inputs,RL220-250 VDC, 30 mA,for pulse counting
K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
IOM 8 inputs, 10+2output, RL24-30 VDC,50 mA
L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
IOM 8 inputs, 10+2output, RL48-60 VDC,50 mA
M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1
IOM 8 inputs, 10+2output, RL110-125 VDC,50 mA
N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
IOM 8 inputs, 10+2output, RL220-250VDC, 50 mA
P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
IOM 8 inputs 10+2output relays, 220-250VDC, 110mA
P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
IOM with MOV 8 inputs,10-2 output, 24-30 VDC,30 mA
U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
IOM with MOV 8 inputs,10-2 output, 48-60VDC, 30 mA
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
IOM with MOV 8 inputs,10-2 output, 110-125VDC, 30 mA
W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
IOM with MOV 8 inputs,10-2 output, 220-250VDC, 30 mA
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
mA input module MIM6 channels
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 139
Table 220. Binary input/output module selection, continuedBinary input/outputmodules
Selection Notes and Rules
SOM Static outputmodule, 12 outputs,48-60 VDC
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Note: SOM must not be placedin the following positions; 1/2case slot X51, 3/4 case 1 TRMslot X101, 3/4 case 2 TRM slotX71, 1/1 case 1 TRM slot X161,1/1 case 2 TRM slot X131
SOM static outputsmodule, 12 outputs,110-250 VDC
T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
Selected.
Table 221. Remote end serial communication selection
Remote end communication, DNP serial comm. and time synchronizationmodules
Selection Notes and Rules
Slot position (rear view)
X31
2
X31
3
X30
2
X30
3
X32
2
X32
3 Note: The maximum numberand type of LDCM modulessupported depend on the totalamount of modules (BIM, BOM,LDCM, OEM, GTM, SLM, RS485,IRIG-B) in the IED.
Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 or 1/1 case with 1TRM Note: Max 2 LDCM in 1/2 case
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case with 2 TRM
No remote communication board included X X X X X X
Optical short range LDCM A A A A A A Max 4 LDCM (same or differenttype) can be selected.Always place LDCM modules onthe same board to supportredundant communication; inP30:2 and P30:3, P31:2 and P31:3or P32:2 and P32:3
Optical medium range, LDCM 1310 nm B B B B B B
Optical long range, LDCM 1550 nm C C C C C C
Galvanic X21 line data communication module E E E E E E
IRIG-B Time synchronization module F F F F F F
Galvanic RS485 communication module G G G G G G
GPS time synchronization module S S S S
Selected
Table 222. Serial communication unit for station communication selection
Serial communication unit for station communication Selection Notes and Rules
Slot position (rear view)
X30
1
X31
1
No communication board included X X
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 plastic interface A
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 plastic/glass interface B
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 glass interface C
Optical ethernet module, 1 channel glass D
Optical ethernet module, 2 channel glass E
Selected.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
140 ABB
23. Ordering for pre-configured IEDGUID-0B941090-4C75-45EE-A406-B7A938251673 v9.1.1
GuidelinesCarefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.
To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the tables, as given in the example below.
Example code: RED670 *2.1-A30X00- A02H02-B1A3-AC-MB-B-A3X0-DAB1RGN1N1XXXXXXX-AXFXXX-AX. Using the code of each position #1-13 specified asRED670*1-2 2-3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3-4 4-5-6-7 8-9-10 10 10 10-110 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11-12 12 12 12 12 12-13 13
# 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 6 - 7 8 - 9 -
RED670* - - - - - - -
10 - 11 - 12 - 13
- . -
Posi
tion
SOFTWARE #1 Notes and Rules
Version number
Version no 2.1
Selection for position #1.
Configuration alternatives #2 Notes and Rules
Single breaker, 3 phase tripping A31
Multi breaker, 3 phase tripping B31
Single breaker, 1 phase tripping A32
Multi breaker, 1 phase tripping B32
ACT configuration
ABB standard configuration X00
Selection for position #2.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 141
Software options #3 Notes and Rules
No option X00
All fields in theordering form do notneed to be filled in
High impedance differential protection A02
Line differential protection 6 CT sets,3-5 line ends
A04
Note: Only one Linedifferential protectionhave to be selectedNote: A04/A05 only inA31/A32
Line differential protection 3 CT sets,with in-zone transformers, 2-3 line ends
A05
Line differential protection 6 CT sets,with in-zone transformers, 3-5 line ends
A06
Power swing logic B03
Phase preference logic B04
Note: Only for A31
Phase segregated schemecommunication
B05
Note: Only for A32 andB32
Distance zones quadrilateral, 4th zone B10
Note: Only one ofB10/B11/B16/B17/B28/B29 to be selected.B11 is required withB10.1 block of STBPTOCalready included inB31/B32
Distance zones quadrilateral, 3 zones B11
Distance zones quadrilateral seriescompensation, 3 zones
B16
Line Distance protection - mho - 4 zones B17
High speed distance protection,quadrilateral and mho - 6 zones
B28
High speed distance protection forseries compensated lines, quadrilateraland mho - 6 zones
B29
Out-of-step protection B22
Sensitive directional residualovercurrent and power protection
C16
Directional power protection C17
Residual overcurrent protection C24
Overexcitation protection D03
Frequency protections - line E02
General current and voltage protection F01
Fuse failure supervision based onvoltage difference
G03
Autorecloser, 1 circuit breaker H04
Note: H04 only forA31/A32, 1 blockalready included
Autorecloser, 2 circuit breaker H05
Note: H05 only forB31/B32, 2 blocksalready included
Apparatus control 10 objects H27
Note: Only oneApparatus control canbe orderedNote: H27 only for A31/A32, H08 only forB31/B32
Apparatus control 15 objects H08
Circuit breaker condition monitoring - 3CB
M13
Note: M13 only forA31/32, M15 only forB31/B32 Circuit breaker condition monitoring - 6
CBM15
IEC 62439-3 parallel redundancyprotocol
P03
Note: P03 requires a 2-channel OEM.
Selection for position #3
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
142 ABB
First local HMI user dialogue language #4 Notes and Rules
HMI language, English IEC B1
Additional local HMI user dialogue language
No additional HMI language X0
HMI language, English US A12
Selection for position #4.
Casing #5 Notes and Rules
1/2 x 19" case A
3/4 x 19" case 1 TRM slot B
3/4 x 19" case 2 TRM slots C
1/1 x 19" case 1TRM slots D
1/1 x 19" case 2 TRM slots E
Selection for position #5.
Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front #6 Notes and Rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case of 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 A
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRGHS6 B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case C
Wall mounting kit D Note: Wall mounting notrecommended withcommunication modules withfiber connection (SLM, OEM,LDCM)
Flush mounting kit E
Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal F
Selection for position #6.
Connection type #7 Notes and Rules
Connection type for Power supply module
Compression terminals M
Ringlug terminals N
Connection type for input/output and communication modules
Compression terminals P
Selection for position #7.
Auxiliary power supply #8 Notes and Rules
24-60 VDC A
90-250 VDC B
Selection for position #8.
Human machine hardware interface #9 Notes and Rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols B
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols C
Selection for position #9.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 143
Analog input system #10 Notes and Rules
Compression terminals A
Ringlug terminals B
First TRM, 6I+6U 1A, 100/220V 6
First TRM, 6I+6U 5A, 100/220V 7
First TRM, 3I, 5A + 3I, 1A + 6U, 110/220V 16 Note: Only for A31 and A32
No second TRM included X0
Compression terminals A
Ringlug terminals B
Second TRM, 9I+3U 1A, 110/220V 3
Second TRM, 9I+3U 5A, 110/220V 4
Second TRM, 5I, 1A+4I, 5A+3U, 110/220V 5
Second TRM, 6I+6U, 1A, 110/220V 6
Second TRM, 6I+6U, 5A, 110/220V 7
Second TRM, 6I, 1A, 110/220V 8
Second TRM, 6I, 5A, 5A, 110/220V 9
Second TRM, 7I+5U 1A, 110/220V 12
Second TRM, 7I+5U 5A, 110/220V 13
Second TRM, 3I, 5A + 3I, 1A + 6U, 110/220V 16 Note: Only for A31 and A32
Selection for position #10.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
144 ABB
Binary input/output module, mA and time synchronizatingboards.
#11 Notes and Rules
Make BIM with 50 mA inrush current the primary choice. BIM with 50 mA inrush current fulfill additional standards. As a consequence the EMC withstandcapability is further increased.BIM with 30 mA inrush current is still available.For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used.Note: 1BIM and 1 BOM included.
Slot position (rear view)
X31
X41 X51
X61 X71
X81
X91
X10
1
X11
1
X12
1
X13
1
X14
1
X15
1
X16
1 Note: Max 3 positions in 1/2rack, 8 in 3/4 rack with 1 TRM, 5in 3/4 rack with 2 TRM, 14 in 1/1rack with 1 TRM and 11 in 1/1rack with 2 TRM
1/2 Case with 1 TRM
3/4 Case with 1 TRM
3/4 Case with 2 TRM
1/1 Case with 1 TRM
1/1 Case with 2 TRM
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output module 24 output relays (BOM) A A A A A A A A A A A A A Note: Maximum 4 (BOM+SOM+MIM) boards.
BIM 16 inputs, RL24-30 VDC, 50 mA B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
BIM 16 inputs, RL48-60 VDC, 50 mA C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
BIM 16 inputs, RL110-125 VDC, 50 mA D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
BIM 16 inputs, RL220-250 VDC, 50 mA E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
BIM 16 inputs, 220-250 VDC, 120mA E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
BIMp 16 inputs, RL24-30 VDC, 30 mA, for pulse counting F F F F F F F F F F F F
BIMp 16 inputs, RL48-60 VDC, 30 mA, for pulse counting G G G G G G G G G G G G
BIMp 16 inputs, RL110-125 VDC, 30 mA, for pulse counting H H H H H H H H H H H H
BIM 16 inputs, RL220-250 VDC, 30 mA, for pulse counting K K K K K K K K K K K K
IOM 8 inputs, 10+2 output, RL24-30 VDC, 50 mA L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
IOM 8 inputs, 10+2 output, RL48-60 VDC, 50 mA M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
IOM 8 inputs, 10+2 output, RL110-125 VDC, 50 mA N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
IOM 8 inputs, 10+2 output, RL220-250 VDC, 50 mA P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
IOM 8 inputs 10+2 output relays, 220-250 VDC, 110mA P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
IOM with MOV 8 inputs, 10-2 output, 24-30 VDC, 30 mA U U U U U U U U U U U U
IOM with MOV 8 inputs, 10-2 output, 48-60 VDC, 30 mA V V V V V V V V V V V V
IOM with MOV 8 inputs, 10-2 output, 110-125 VDC, 30 mA W W W W W W W W W W W W
IOM with MOV 8 inputs, 10-2 output, 220-250 VDC, 30 mA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
mA input module MIM 6 channels R R R R R R R R R R R R Note: maximum 1 MIM board in1/2 case
SOM Static output module, 12 outputs, 48-60 VDC T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
Note: SOM must not to beplaced in position nearest toNUM; 1/2 case slot P5, 3/4 case1 TRM slot P10, 3/4 case 2 TRMslot P7, 1/1 case 1 TRM slot P16,1/1 case 2 TRM slot P13
SOM static outputs module, 12 outputs, 110-250 VDC T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
Selection for position #11.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 145
Remote end communication, DNP serial comm. and time synchronizationmodules
#12 Notes and Rules
Slot position (rear view)
X31
2
X31
3
X30
2
X30
3
X32
2
X32
3 Note: The maximum numberand type of LDCM modulessupported depend on the totalamount of modules (BIM, BOM,LDCM, OEM, GTM, SLM, RS485,IRIG-B) in the IED.
Available slots in 1/2 and 3/4 case with 1TRM Note: Only for A31/A32. OneLDCM must be ordered. Max 2LDCM in 1/2 case.
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case with 2 TRM Note: 2 LDCM in B31 and B32must be ordered. Max 4 LDCM
No remote communication board included X X X X X A31 and A32 - 1 LDCM always inposition P30:2(X302)
No remote communication board included X X X X B31 and B32 - 1 LDCM always inposition P30:2(X302) andP30:3(X303)
Optical short range LDCM A A A A A A Max 4 LDCM (same or differenttype) can be selected.Always place LDCM modules onthe same board to supportredundant communication; inP30:2 and P30:3, P31:2 and P31:3or P32:2 and P32:3
Optical medium range, LDCM 1310 nm B B B B B B
Optical long range, LDCM 1550 nm C C C C C C
Galvanic X21 line data communication module E E E E E E
IRIG-B Time synchronization module, with PPS F F F F F F
Galvanic RS485 communication module G G G G G Note: No RS485 in positionX303 in B31/B32
GPS time module GTM S S S S
Selection for position #12.
Serial communication unit for station communication #13 Notes and Rules
Slot position (rear view)X
301
X31
1
No first communication board included X
No second communication board included X
Serial and LON communication module (plastic) A
Serial (plastic) and LON (glass) communication module B
Serial and LON communication module (glass) C
Optical ethernet module, 1 channel glass D
Optical ethernet module, 2 channel glass E
Selection for position #13.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
146 ABB
24. Ordering for Accessories
AccessoriesIP15151-1 v1
GPS antenna and mounting detailsM12374-3 v5
GPS antenna, including mounting kits Quantity: 1MRK 001 640-AA
Cable for antenna, 20 m (Appx. 65 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-AA
Cable for antenna, 40 m (Appx. 131 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-BA
Interface converter (for remote end data communication)M16668-3 v8
External interface converter from C37.94 to G703 Quantity:
1 2 3 4 1MRK 002 245-AA
External interface converter from C37.94 to G703.E1 Quantity:
1 2 3 4 1MRK 002 245-BA
Test switchSEMOD111888-5 v11
The test system COMBITEST intended for use with theIEDs is described in 1MRK 512 001-BEN and 1MRK001024-CA. Please refer to the website:www.abb.com/substationautomation for detailedinformation.
Due to the high flexibility of our product and the widevariety of applications possible the test switches needsto be selected for each specific application.
Select your suitable test switch base on the availablecontacts arrangements shown in the referencedocumentation.
However our proposals for suitable variants are;
Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internalneutral on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-AK).
Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with externalneutral on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-AC).
Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internalneutral on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-BE).
Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with externalneutral on current circuit (ordering number RK926 315-BV).
The normally open "In test mode" contact 29-30 on theRTXP test switches should be connected to the input ofthe test function block to allow activation of functionsindividually during testing.
Test switches type RTXP 24 is ordered separately. Pleaserefer to Section Related documents for references tocorresponding documents.
RHGS 6 Case or RHGS 12 Case with mounted RTXP 24and the on/off switch for dc-supply are orderedseparately. Please refer to Section Related documentsfor references to corresponding documents.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 147
Protection coverM15040-3 v5
Protective cover for rear side of RHGS6, 6U, 1/4 x 19” Quantity:
1MRK 002 420-AE
Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/2 x 19” Quantity:
1MRK 002 420-AC
Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 3/4 x 19” Quantity:
1MRK 002 420-AB
Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/1 x 19” Quantity:
1MRK 002 420-AA
External resistor unitSEMOD120228-4 v7
High impedance resistor unit 1-ph with resistor and voltage dependent resistor for20-100V operating voltage
Quantity:
1 2 3 RK 795 101-MA
High impedance resistor unit 3-ph with resistor and voltage dependent resistor for20-100V operating voltage
Quantity:
RK 795 101-MB
High impedance resistor unit 1-ph with resistor and voltage dependent resistor for100-400V operating voltage
Quantity:
1 2 3 RK 795 101-CB
High impedance resistor unit 3-ph with resistor and voltage dependent resistor for100-400V operating voltage
Quantity:
RK 795 101-DC
CombiflexIP15161-1 v1
Key switch for settingsSEMOD130356-4 v5
Key switch for lock-out of settings via LCD-HMI Quantity:
1MRK 000 611-A
Note: To connect the key switch, leads with 10 A Combiflex socket on one end must be used.SEMOD130267-5 v6
Mounting kit Ordering number
Side-by-side mounting kit Quantity:
1MRK 002 420-Z
Configuration and monitoring toolsIP15162-1 v2M15042-3 v3
Front connection cable between LCD-HMI and PC Quantity:
1MRK 001 665-CA
SEMOD131414-4 v3
LED Label special paper A4, 1 pc Quantity:
1MRK 002 038-CA
LED Label special paper Letter, 1 pc Quantity:
1MRK 002 038-DA
ManualsM15161-3 v11
Note: One (1) IED Connect CD containing user documentation (Operation manual, Technicalmanual, Installation manual, Commissioning manual, Application manual and Getting startedguide), Connectivity packages and LED label template is always included for each IED.
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
148 ABB
Rule: Specify additional quantity of IED Connect CD requested. Quantity:
1MRK 002 290-AD
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 149
User documentation
Rule: Specify the number of printed manuals requested
Application manual IEC Quantity:
1MRK 505 343-UEN
ANSI Quantity:
1MRK 505 307-UUS
Technical manual IEC Quantity:
1MRK 505 308-UEN
ANSI Quantity:
1MRK 505 308-UUS
Commissioning manual IEC Quantity:
1MRK 505 345-UEN
ANSI Quantity:
1MRK 505 309-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1
IEC Quantity:
1MRK 511 349-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 IEC Quantity:
1MRK 511 350-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 IEC Quantity:
1MRK 511 351-UEN
Communication protocol manual, LON IEC Quantity:
1MRK 511 352-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA IEC Quantity:
1MRK 511 353-UEN
Communication protocol manual,DNP
ANSI Quantity:
1MRK 511 348-UUS
Point list manual, DNP ANSI Quantity 1MRK 511 354-UUS
Operation manual IEC Quantity:
1MRK 500 123-UEN
ANSI Quantity:
1MRK 500 123-UUS
Installation manual IEC Quantity:
1MRK 514 024-UEN
ANSI Quantity:
1MRK 514 024-UUS
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
150 ABB
Engineering manual, 670 series IEC Quantity:
1MRK 511 355-UEN
ANSI Quantity:
1MRK 511 355-UUS
Cyber security guideline IEC Quantity:
1MRK 511 356-UEN
Reference informationM2175-3 v4
For our reference and statistics we would be pleased to be provided with the following application data:
Country: End user:
Station name: Voltage level: kV
Related documentsGUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v4
Documents related to RED670 Document numbers
Application manual IEC:1MRK 505 343-UENANSI:1MRK 505 343-UUS
Commissioning manual IEC:1MRK 505 345-UENANSI:1MRK 505 345-UUS
Product guide 1MRK 505 346-BEN
Technical manual IEC:1MRK 505 308-UENANSI:1MRK 505 308-UUS
Type test certificate IEC:1MRK 505 346-TENANSI:1MRK 505 346-TUS
670 series manuals Document numbers
Operation manual IEC:1MRK 500 123-UENANSI:1MRK 500 123-UUS
Engineering manual IEC:1MRK 511 355-UENANSI:1MRK 511 355-UUS
Installation manual IEC:1MRK 514 024-UENANSI:1MRK 514 024-UUS
Communication protocolmanual, DNP3
1MRK 511 348-UUS
Communication protocolmanual, IEC 60870-5-103
1MRK 511 351-UEN
Communication protocolmanual, IEC 61850 Edition 1
1MRK 511 349-UEN
Communication protocolmanual, IEC 61850 Edition 2
1MRK 511 350-UEN
Communication protocolmanual, LON
1MRK 511 352-UEN
Communication protocolmanual, SPA
1MRK 511 353-UEN
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 354-UUS
Accessories guide IEC:1MRK 514 012-BENANSI:1MRK 514 012-BUS
Cyber security deploymentguideline
1MRK 511 356-UEN
Connection and Installationcomponents
1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
1MRK 505 346-BEN FLine differential protection RED670 2.1 IEC
ABB 151
152
ABB ABSubstation Automation ProductsSE-721 59 Västerås, SwedenPhone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
www.abb.com/substationautomation
© Copyright 2015 ABB.All rights reserved.
Scan this QR code to visit our website
1MR
K 5
05
346-
BE
N